HP LaserJet P3010 Service Manual ENWW P3015

User Manual: HP Laserjet P3015 shared.swissparts.ch - /Manuals/HP/LaserJet/Mono Laserjet/

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 342

DownloadHP LaserJet P3010 Service Manual - ENWW P3015
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
HP LaserJet P3010 Series Printers
Service Manual

Additional product information:
www.hp.com/support/ljp3010series

HP LaserJet P3010 Series Printers
Service Manual

Copyright and License

Trademark Credits

© 2009 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.

Adobe® is a trademark of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.

Reproduction, adaptation, or translation
without prior written permission is prohibited,
except as allowed under the copyright laws.

Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® XP, and
Windows Vista® are U.S. registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

The information contained herein is subject
to change without notice.

ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR
mark are registered U.S. marks.

The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be
construed as constituting an additional
warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical
or editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.
Part number: CE524-90909
Edition 1, 7/2009

Conventions used in this guide
TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.
NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.
CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the
product.
WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury,
catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.

ENWW

iii

iv

Conventions used in this guide

ENWW

Table of contents

1 Theory of operation
Basic operation ..................................................................................................................................... 2
Major printer systems .......................................................................................................... 2
Printer block diagram ........................................................................................................... 2
Sequence of operation ......................................................................................................... 3
Normal sequence of operation ............................................................................ 3
Formatter-control system ..................................................................................................................... 4
Sleep mode .......................................................................................................................... 4
Input/output .......................................................................................................................... 4
CPU ..................................................................................................................................... 4
Memory ................................................................................................................................ 5
Optional hard disk ............................................................................................... 5
Firmware ............................................................................................................. 5
Nonvolatile memory ............................................................................................ 5
PJL overview ....................................................................................................................... 5
PML ..................................................................................................................................... 5
Control panel ....................................................................................................................... 5
Engine-control system .......................................................................................................................... 6
Motors, fans, clutches, solenoids, switches, and sensors ................................................... 7
DC controller operations .................................................................................................... 14
Fuser-control circuit ........................................................................................................... 16
Fuser failure detection ....................................................................................... 17
Fuser temperature control ................................................................................. 18
Fuser protective function ................................................................................... 19
Low-voltage power supply ................................................................................................. 20
Overcurrent/overvoltage protection ................................................................... 21
High-voltage power supply ................................................................................................ 22
Formatter ........................................................................................................................... 23
Formatter heartbeat LED .................................................................................. 23
DIMM slots ........................................................................................................ 23
Laser/scanner system ........................................................................................................ 24
Laser failure detection ....................................................................................... 25
Image-formation system ..................................................................................................................... 26
Electrophotographic process ............................................................................................. 26

ENWW

v

Image formation process ................................................................................................... 27
Latent-image formation stage ........................................................................... 28
Primary charging .............................................................................. 28
Laser beam exposure ....................................................................... 28
Developing stage .............................................................................................. 29
Print cartridge ................................................................................... 29
Transfer stage ................................................................................................... 30
Fusing stage ..................................................................................... 30
Cleaning stage .................................................................................. 31
Toner detection .................................................................................................................. 32
Pickup, feed, and delivery system ...................................................................................................... 33
Paper trays ........................................................................................................................ 33
Photo sensors and switches .............................................................................................. 34
Solenoids and clutches ...................................................................................................... 36
Tray 1 or Tray 2 .................................................................................................................................. 38
Pickup and feed unit .......................................................................................................... 38
Cassette paper size detection/cassette paper detection ................................... 38
Cassette pickup ................................................................................................. 38
Tray 1 paper pickup ........................................................................................................... 38
Paper pickup and feed ....................................................................................................... 39
Jam detection .................................................................................................................... 40
Additional tray ..................................................................................................................................... 41
Tray driver PCA ................................................................................................................. 41
Paper pickup and feed ....................................................................................................... 42
Media level and size detection ........................................................................................... 43
Jam detection .................................................................................................................... 43
2 Removal and replacement
Removal and replacement strategy ................................................................................................... 46
General cautions during removal and replacement ........................................................... 46
Electrostatic discharge ...................................................................................... 46
Required tools ................................................................................................... 46
Types of screws ................................................................................................ 47
Service approach ............................................................................................................................... 48
Before performing service .................................................................................................. 48
After performing service ..................................................................................................... 48
Post-service test ................................................................................................................ 48
Print-quality test ................................................................................................ 48
Parts removal order ........................................................................................................... 50
Removal and replacement procedures .............................................................................................. 52
Print cartridge, cassettes, and sub cover ........................................................................... 52
Print cartridge .................................................................................................... 52
Tray cassette (Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4) .......................................................... 54

vi

ENWW

Sub cover .......................................................................................................... 55
External panels, covers, doors, formatter PCA, DIMM, and EIO disk ............................... 56
EIO disk ............................................................................................................. 56
DIMM cover and DIMM ..................................................................................... 57
Reinstall the DIMM ........................................................................... 58
Formatter cover and formatter PCA .................................................................. 60
Rear-door assembly .......................................................................................... 62
Left cover .......................................................................................................... 66
Right-rear cover ................................................................................................ 68
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) cover ....................................................................... 69
Cartridge-door assembly ................................................................................... 71
Top-right cover .................................................................................................. 73
Control panel ..................................................................................................... 74
Front-right and right-side cover assembly ......................................................... 76
Lower-right cover and bracket ........................................................................... 80
Reinstall the lower-right cover .......................................................... 82
Top cover .......................................................................................................... 84
Main assemblies ................................................................................................................ 86
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup roller ............................................................. 86
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) separation pad ........................................................ 87
Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 pickup roller ............................................................... 88
Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 separation pad ........................................................... 90
Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 base-plate roller assembly ........................................ 91
Transfer roller .................................................................................................... 92
USB port PCA ................................................................................................... 94
Power-switch assembly ..................................................................................... 96
Main fan, fan duct, and environmental sensor .................................................. 98
Fuser ............................................................................................................... 100
Registration assembly ..................................................................................... 102
Duplex media-feed assembly .......................................................................... 104
Laser/scanner ................................................................................................. 107
Engine control unit (ECU) ............................................................................... 110
Cassette pickup (Tray 2) solenoid or Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup
solenoid ........................................................................................................... 115
Fuser motor ..................................................................................................... 117
Sub fan and fan duct ....................................................................................... 118
High-voltage power supply (HVPS) ................................................................. 121
3 Solve problems
Solve problems checklist .................................................................................................................. 128
Menu map ........................................................................................................................................ 130
Troubleshooting process .................................................................................................................. 131
Determine the problem source ........................................................................................ 131
Power subsystem ............................................................................................................ 132

ENWW

vii

Power-on checks ............................................................................................. 132
Tools for troubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 133
Individual component diagnostics .................................................................................... 133
LED diagnostics .............................................................................................. 133
LED indicators ................................................................................ 133
Formatter heartbeat LED ................................................................ 133
HP Jetdirect LEDs .......................................................................... 134
Engine diagnostics .......................................................................................... 134
Engine-test button .......................................................................... 134
Fuser test page ............................................................................................... 135
Paper-path test (and automatic sensors test) ................................................. 136
Sensor test (interactive) .................................................................................. 137
A TOP (Top-of-Page) sensor .......................................................... 140
B Fuser output sensor .................................................................... 141
C Duplex sensor ............................................................................. 142
D Paper width sensor 1 .................................................................. 143
E Tray 3 feed sensor ...................................................................... 144
F Tray 4 feed sensor ...................................................................... 145
G FD tray full sensor ....................................................................... 146
H Face up detect sensor ................................................................ 147
I Cartridge-door open switch .......................................................... 148
J Rear cover open sensor .............................................................. 149
K Tray 1 paper sensor .................................................................... 150
L Tray 2 paper sensor .................................................................... 151
M Tray 2 detect switch .................................................................... 152
N Tray 3 paper sensor .................................................................... 153
O Tray 3 detect switch .................................................................... 154
P Tray 4 paper sensor .................................................................... 155
Q Tray 4 detect switch .................................................................... 156
Print/stop test .................................................................................................. 157
Component tests ............................................................................................. 158
Half self-test .................................................................................... 158
Drum rotation test check ................................................................. 158
Diagnostics menu components test ................................................ 158
Diagrams ......................................................................................................................... 160
Block diagrams ................................................................................................ 160
Plug/jack locations .......................................................................................... 162
Location of connectors .................................................................................... 163
ECU controller connections ............................................................ 163
Locations of major components ...................................................................... 165
General timing charts ...................................................................................... 169
General circuit diagram ................................................................................... 170
Internal print quality test pages ........................................................................................ 171
Cleaning page ................................................................................................. 172

viii

ENWW

Configuration page .......................................................................................... 172
Print quality troubleshooting tools .................................................................................... 173
Repetitive image-defect ruler .......................................................................... 173
Control-panel menus ....................................................................................................... 174
Use the menus ................................................................................................ 174
Show Me How menu ....................................................................................... 174
Retrieve job menu ........................................................................................... 175
Information menu ............................................................................................ 176
Paper handling menu ...................................................................................... 177
Manage supplies menu ................................................................................... 177
Configure device menu ................................................................................... 178
Printing menu ................................................................................. 178
Print Quality menu .......................................................................... 180
System setup menu ........................................................................ 183
I/O menu ......................................................................................... 187
Resets menu .................................................................................. 194
Diagnostics menu ............................................................................................ 194
Service menu .................................................................................................. 196
Interpret control-panel messages .................................................................................... 197
Control-panel message types ......................................................................... 197
Control-panel messages ................................................................................. 197
Event-log messages ........................................................................................................ 215
Print an event log ............................................................................................ 215
Show an event log ........................................................................................... 215
Sample event-log page ................................................................................... 216
Clear an event log ........................................................................................... 216
Event-log messages ........................................................................................ 217
Clear jams ........................................................................................................................................ 219
Common causes of jams ................................................................................................. 219
Jam locations ................................................................................................................... 220
Clear jams from the input trays ........................................................................................ 222
Clear jams from the duplexer ........................................................................................... 226
Clear jams from the output areas .................................................................................... 231
Clear jams from inside the product .................................................................................. 234
Registration and transfer area ......................................................................... 234
Jam causes and solutions ............................................................................................... 236
Avoid repeated jams ....................................................................................................... 240
Change jam recovery ....................................................................................................... 241
Solve paper-handling problems ........................................................................................................ 242
Product feeds multiple sheets .......................................................................................... 242
Product feeds incorrect page size ................................................................................... 242
Product pulls from incorrect tray ...................................................................................... 243
Paper does not feed automatically .................................................................................. 243
Paper does not feed from Tray 2, 3, or 4 ......................................................................... 244

ENWW

ix

Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed .................................................................. 244
Envelopes jam or will not feed in the product .................................................................. 245
Output is curled or wrinkled ............................................................................................. 245
Product does not duplex or duplexes incorrectly (duplex models) .................................. 246
Solve image-quality problems .......................................................................................................... 247
Image defect examples .................................................................................................... 247
Clean the product ............................................................................................................................. 254
Solve performance problems ........................................................................................................... 257
Solve connectivity problems ............................................................................................................. 258
Solve direct-connect problems ........................................................................................ 258
Solve network problems .................................................................................................. 258
Service mode functions .................................................................................................................... 259
Service menu ................................................................................................................... 259
Product resets .................................................................................................................. 260
Restore factory settings .................................................................................. 260
Hard disk initialization ..................................................................................... 260
Skip disk-load .................................................................................................. 260
NVRAM initialization ........................................................................................ 260
Service ID ....................................................................................... 261
Restore service ID .......................................................................... 261
Convert the service ID to an actual date ........................................ 261
Reset serial number ....................................................................... 262
Reset page counts .......................................................................... 262
Product cold reset ........................................................................................... 262
Product updates ............................................................................................................................... 263
Determine the current firmware version ........................................................................... 263
Download new firmware from the HP Web site ............................................................... 263
Transfer the new firmware to the product ........................................................................ 263
Use the flash executable file to update the firmware ...................................... 263
Use FTP to upload the firmware through a browser ....................................... 264
Use FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection ........................... 264
Use HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the firmware ............................................. 265
Use Microsoft Windows commands to upgrade the firmware ......................... 265
Upgrade the HP Jetdirect firmware .................................................................................. 265
4 Parts and diagrams
Order parts by authorized service providers .................................................................................... 268
Order parts, accessories, and supplies ........................................................................... 268
Related documentation and software .............................................................................. 268
Supplies part numbers ..................................................................................................... 268
Accessories part numbers ............................................................................................... 269
Whole-unit replacement part numbers ............................................................................. 270
How to use the parts lists and diagrams .......................................................................................... 271

x

ENWW

Assembly locations ........................................................................................................................... 272
Base product (no optional trays or accessories) .............................................................. 272
Base product (optional trays or accessories) ................................................................... 273
Covers .............................................................................................................................................. 274
Internal assemblies (1 of 6) .............................................................................................................. 276
Internal assemblies (2 of 6) .............................................................................................................. 278
Internal assemblies (3 of 6) .............................................................................................................. 280
Internal assemblies (4 of 6) .............................................................................................................. 282
Internal assemblies (5 of 6) .............................................................................................................. 284
Internal assemblies (6 of 6) .............................................................................................................. 286
Input devices .................................................................................................................................... 288
500-sheet input tray (Tray 3 and Tray 4) ......................................................................... 288
Alphabetical parts list ....................................................................................................................... 290
Numerical parts list ........................................................................................................................... 293
Appendix A Service and support
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement .................................................................................... 298
HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet print cartridge limited warranty statement ................ 299
End User License Agreement .......................................................................................................... 300
Customer self-repair warranty service .............................................................................................. 302
Customer support ............................................................................................................................. 303
Repack the product .......................................................................................................................... 304
Service information form .................................................................................................................. 305
Appendix B Specifications
Physical specifications ..................................................................................................................... 308
Electrical specifications .................................................................................................................... 308
Acoustic specifications ..................................................................................................................... 308
Environmental specifications ............................................................................................................ 309
Appendix C Regulatory information
FCC regulations ............................................................................................................................... 312
Environmental product stewardship program ................................................................................... 313
Protecting the environment .............................................................................................. 313
Ozone production ............................................................................................................ 313
Power consumption ......................................................................................................... 313
Toner consumption .......................................................................................................... 313
Paper use ........................................................................................................................ 313
Plastics ............................................................................................................................ 313
HP LaserJet print supplies ............................................................................................... 313
Return and recycling instructions ..................................................................................... 314
United States and Puerto Rico ........................................................................ 314
Multiple returns (more than one cartridge) ..................................... 314

ENWW

xi

Single returns ................................................................................. 314
Shipping .......................................................................................... 314
Non-U.S. returns ............................................................................................. 314
Paper ............................................................................................................................... 314
Material restrictions .......................................................................................................... 315
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union .... 315
Chemical substances ....................................................................................................... 315
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) ................................................................................ 316
For more information ....................................................................................................... 316
Declaration of conformity .................................................................................................................. 317
Safety statements ............................................................................................................................. 318
Laser safety ..................................................................................................................... 318
Canadian DOC regulations .............................................................................................. 318
VCCI statement (Japan) .................................................................................................. 318
Power cord statement (Japan) ......................................................................................... 318
EMC statement (Korea) ................................................................................................... 318
Laser statement for Finland ............................................................................................. 319
Substances Table (China) ............................................................................................... 320
Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 321

xii

ENWW

1

ENWW

Theory of operation

●

Basic operation

●

Formatter-control system

●

Engine-control system

●

Image-formation system

●

Pickup, feed, and delivery system

●

Tray 1 or Tray 2

●

Additional tray

1

Basic operation
Major printer systems
The product contains the following five systems:
●

Engine-control system

●

Laser/scanner system

●

Image-formation system

●

Media feed system

●

Option

Printer block diagram
Figure 1-1 Printer block diagram
LASER SCANNER SYSTEM

IMAGE-FORMATION SYSTEM

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

MEDIA FEED SYSTEM

OPTION

2

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

ENWW

Sequence of operation
The DC controller in the engine-control system controls the operational sequences of the printer. The
table below describes durations and operations for each period of a print operation from when the printer
is turned on until the motor stops rotating

Normal sequence of operation
Table 1-1 Sequence of operation
Name

Timing

Purpose

WAIT

From the time the power switch is turned on or the
door is closed until the printer is ready for a print
operation.

Brings the product to printable condition. The product
performs the following during the operation:
●

Detects the print cartridge

STBY (standby)

From the end of the WAIT or LSTR period until either
a print command is sent or the power switch is turned
off.

Maintains the product in printable condition.

INTR (initial
rotation)

From the time the print command is received until the
temperature of the fuser unit reaches its targeted
temperature.

Starts up the high-voltage biases, the laser/scanner
and the fuser unit for printing.

PRINT

From the end of the INTR period until the last sheet
completes the fuser operation.

Forms the image on the photosensitive drum based
on the VIDEO signals from the formatter. Transfers
and fuses the toner image to the paper.

LSTR (last
rotation)

From the end of the PRINT period until the main motor
stops rotating.

Moves the last printed sheet out of the product.
The product enters the INTR period as the LSTR
period is completed, if the formatter sends another
print command.

ENWW

Basic operation

3

Formatter-control system
The formatter is responsible for the following procedures:
●

Controlling sleep mode

●

Receiving and processing print data from the various product interfaces

●

Monitoring control-panel functions and relaying product-status information (through the control
panel and the network or bidirectional interface)

●

Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the DC controller PCA

●

Storing font information

●

Communicating with the host computer through the network or the bidirectional interface

The formatter receives a print job from the network or bidirectional interface and separates it into image
information and instructions that control the printing process. The DC controller PCA synchronizes the
image-formation system with the paper-input and -output systems, and then signals the formatter to
send the print-image data.
The formatter also provides the electrical interface and mounting locations for one EIO card and an
additional DIMM.

Sleep mode
NOTE: In the SYSTEM SETUP menu, this item is termed SLEEP DELAY.
This feature conserves power after the product has been idle for an adjustable period of time. When the
product is in SLEEP DELAY, the control-panel backlight is turned off, but the product retains all settings,
downloaded fonts, and macros. The default setting is for SLEEP DELAY to be enabled, and the product
enters SLEEP DELAY after a 30-minute idle time.
The product exists SLEEP DELAY and enters the warm-up cycle when any of the following events
occur:
●

A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received

●

A control-panel button is pressed

●

A cover is opened

●

A paper tray is opened

●

The engine-test switch is pressed

NOTE: Product error messages override the Sleep message. The product enters SLEEP DELAY at
the appropriate time, but the error message continues to appear.

Input/output
The product receives print data primarily from the embedded HP Jetdirect print server. The product also
has a USB 2.0 port for connecting directly to a computer.

CPU
The formatter incorporates a 540 MHz Coldfire processor.

4

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

ENWW

Memory
The random access memory (RAM) on the formatter PCA contains the page, I/O buffers, and the font
storage area. It stores printing and font information received from the host system, and can also serve
to temporarily store a full page of print-image data before the data is sent to the print engine. Memory
capacity can be increased by adding a DIMM to the formatter. Note that adding memory might also
increase the print speed for complex graphics.
NOTE: If the product encounters a problem when managing available memory, a clearable warning
message appears on the control-panel display.

Optional hard disk
This product supports an optional EIO hard disk or an optional secure hard disk as an accessory.

Firmware
The firmware is contained on NAND flash memory soldered on the formatter board. A remote firmware
upgrade process is available, which overwrites the firmware in the NAND flash.

Nonvolatile memory
The product uses nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) to store device and user configuration settings. The
contents of NVRAM are retained when the product is turned off or disconnected.

PJL overview
The printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of configuration, in addition to the standard printer
command language (PCL). With standard cabling, the product can use PJL to perform a variety of
functions such as these:
●

Two-way communication with the host computer through a network connection or a USB
connection. The product can inform the host about such things as the control-panel settings, and
the control-panel settings can be changed from the host.

●

Dynamic I/O switching. The product uses this switching to be configured with a host on each I/O.
The product can receive data from more than one I/O simultaneously, until the I/O buffer is full.
This can occur even when the product is offline.

●

Context-sensitive switching. The product can automatically recognize the personality (PS or PCL)
of each job and configure itself to serve that personality.

●

Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next. For example, if a print job is
sent to the product in landscape mode, the subsequent print jobs print in landscape mode only if
they are formatted for landscape printing.

PML
The printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration and status read-back through the
I/O ports.

Control panel
The formatter sends and receives product status and command data to and from the control-panel PCA.

ENWW

Formatter-control system

5

Engine-control system
The engine-control system coordinates all product functions, according to commands that the formatter
sends. The engine-control system drives the laser/scanner system, the image formation system, and
the pickup/feed/delivery system.
The engine control system contains the following major components:
●

●

Engine-control unit (ECU)
◦

DC controller

◦

Low-voltage power supply

High-voltage power supply

Figure 1-2 Engine-control system
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

Engine controller
LASER SCANNER SYSTEM

DC controller

IMAGE-FORMATION SYSTEM
Formatter
Low-voltage
power supply
MEDIA FEED SYSTEM

High-voltage
power supply
OPTION

6

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

ENWW

Motors, fans, clutches, solenoids, switches, and sensors
Figure 1-3 Motors
Fuser motor
Main motor

Table 1-2 Motors
Description

Components driven

Fault detection

Main motor (M8001)

●

Pickup roller

Yes

●

Feed roller

●

Transfer roller

●

Photosensitive drum

●

Developing roller

●

Duplex repickup roller (duplex models only)

●

Pressure roller

●

Delivery roller

●

Fuser-delivery roller

●

Duplex-feed roller (duplex models only)

Fuser motor (M8002)

ENWW

Yes

Engine-control system

7

Figure 1-4 Fans

Main fan

Sub fan

Table 1-3 Fans
Description

Area cooled

Type

Speed

Main fan (FM1)

Inside the product

Intake

Full

Sub fan (FM2)

Inside the product

Intake

Full

Figure 1-5 Solenoids and clutches (product)
PS4
PS1
M8001
SW501
PS8001

SL1
PS2

PS225

PS215

PS205

PS502
M8002

SL2
PS3

SW235

Table 1-4 Solenoids and clutches (product)

8

Item

Description

SL1

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup solenoid

SL2

Cassette (Tray 2) pickup solenoid

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

ENWW

Figure 1-6 Solenoids and clutches (Tray 3 and Tray 4)
M8001

CL1

PS8008

SL3
PS451

SW461

Table 1-5 Solenoids and clutches (Tray 3 and Tray 4)

1

ENWW

Item

Description

SL3

Paper feeder pickup solenoid

CL1

Paper feeder pickup clutch

Tray 3 and Tray 4 are identical 500-sheet input trays.

Engine-control system

9

Figure 1-7 Switches (product)
PS4
PS1
M8001
SW501
PS8001

SL1
PS2

PS225

PS215

PS205

PS502
M8002

SL2
PS3

SW235

Table 1-6 Switches (product)

10

Item

Description

SW235

Cassette presence switch

SW501

Cartridge-door switch

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

ENWW

Figure 1-8 Switches (Tray 3 and Tray 4)
M8001

CL1

SL3

PS8008

PS451

SW461

Table 1-7 Switches (Tray 3 and Tray 4)

1

ENWW

Item

Description

SW461

Paper feeder cassette presence switch

Tray 3 and Tray 4 are identical 500-sheet input trays.

Engine-control system

11

Figure 1-9 Sensors
PS4
PS1

PS205

PS2

PS225

PS215

PS8001

PS502
PS3

PS8008
PS451

PS8008
PS451

Table 1-8 Sensors
Item

Description

Item

Description

PS1

Face-up sensor

PS225

Media width sensor

PS2

Fuser delivery sensor

PS502

Duplex media-feed sensor (duplex models only)

PS3

Cassette media-presence sensor

PS451

Paper feeder cassette media-presence sensor
NOTE:

12

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

PS451 is used in Tray 3, and Tray 4

ENWW

Table 1-8 Sensors (continued)
Item

Description

Item

Description

PS4

Face-down tray media-full sensor

PS8001

Rear door sensor

PS205

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) media-presence
sensor

PS8008

Paper feeder media-feed sensor
NOTE:

PS215

ENWW

PS8008 is used in Tray 3, and Tray 4

Top-of-Page (TOP) sensor

Engine-control system

13

DC controller operations
The DC controller controls the operational sequences of the product systems.
Figure 1-10 DC controller block diagram

Engine controller
Motor

AC input

Fan

Low-voltage
power supply

Solenoid
Photointerrupter

Fuser

DC controller
Switch

Print cartridge

High-voltage
power supply

Optional paper-feeder

Laser/scanner
Formatter

Control panel

Table 1-9 DC controller controlled components
Component

Designator

Description

Motor

M8001

Main motor

M8002

Fuser motor

FM1

Main fan

FM2

Sub fan

SL1

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup solenoid

SL2

Cassette (Tray 2) pickup solenoid

Fan

Solenoid

14

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

ENWW

Table 1-9 DC controller controlled components (continued)
Component

Designator

Description

Photointerrupter

PS1

Face-up sensor

PS2

Fuser delivery sensor

PS3

Cassette media presence sensor

PS4

Face-down tray (output bin) media-full sensor

PS205

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) presence sensor

PS215

Top-Of-Page (TOP) sensor

PS225

Media width sensor

PS451

Paper feeder cassette media-presence sensor
NOTE:

Switch

PS502

Duplex media-feed sensor (duplex models only)

PS8001

Rear door sensor

PS8008

Paper feeder media-feed sensor

SW235

Cassette-presence switch
NOTE:

ENWW

PS451 is used in Tray 3, and Tray 4

PS8008 is used in Tray 3, and Tray 4

SW240

Power switch

SW250

Test Print switch

SW501

Cartridge-door switch

Engine-control system

15

Fuser-control circuit
The fuser-control circuit monitors and controls the temperature in the fuser. The product uses ondemand fusing. The fuser-control circuit consists of the following major components:
●

Fuser heater (H1); heats the fusing film

●

Thermistor (TH1 and TH2); detects the fuser temperature (contact type)

●

◦

Main thermistor (TH1); controls the temperature in the fuser (contact type)

◦

Sub thermistor (TH2); detects a one-sided temperature rise in the fuser and controls the
temperature in the fuser (contact type)

Thermoswitch (TP1); prevents abnormal temperature rise in the fuser (contact type)

Figure 1-11 Fuser control circuit
Fuser film

H1
TP1
TH1

Pressure roller

TH2

FUSER TEMPERATURE signal
FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal

DC controller

Fuser heater control
circuit

Fuser heater safety
circuit

Fuser control circuit
Engine controller unit

16

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

ENWW

Fuser failure detection
The DC controller determines a fuser unit failure, deactivates the FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal,
releases the relay to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater and notifies the formatter of a failure
state when it encounters the following conditions:
●

●

●

●

Start-up failure
◦

If the main thermistor does not detect a specified temperature during the start-up process of
the heater in the wait period.

◦

If the main thermistor does not detect a specified temperature during the heater temperature
control in the initial rotation period.

Abnormal low temperature
◦

If the main thermistor detects an abnormal low temperature of the fuser unit during the printing
operation.

◦

If the sub thermistor detects an abnormal low temperature of the fuser unit during the printing
operation.

Abnormal high temperature
◦

If the main thermistor detects an abnormal high temperature of the fuser unit.

◦

If the sub thermistor detects an abnormal high temperature of the fuser unit.

Frequency detection circuit failure
◦

ENWW

If a specified frequency of the ZERO CROSSING signal is not detected within a specified
period after the product is turned on.

Engine-control system

17

Fuser temperature control
The fuser temperature control maintains the temperature of the fuser heater at its targeted temperature.
The DC controller monitors the FUSER TEMPERATURE (FSRTH1, FSRTH2) signals and sends the
FUSER HEATER CONTROL (FSRD) signal according to the detected temperature. The fuser heater
control circuit controls the fuser heater depending on the signal so that the heater remains at the targeted
temperature.
Figure 1-12 Fuser-heater control circuit
Engine controller unit
Fuser control circuit

DC controller

Frequency
detection circuit

ZEROX

Relay control
circuit

RLYD

RL1001
RL1002

Fuser heater
safety circuit
FSRTH2
FSRTH1
FSRD

Fuser heater
control circuit

Fuser film

TH2
TP1

TH1

H1
Pressure roller

H1: Fuser heater
TP1:Thermoswitch
TH1: Main thermistor
TH2: Sub thermistor

Fuser

18

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

ENWW

Fuser protective function
The protective function detects an abnormal temperature rise of the fuser unit and interrupts power
supply to the fuser heater.
The following three protective components prevent an abnormal temperature rise of the fuser heater:
●

DC controller
◦

●

Fuser heater safety circuit
◦

●

The fuser heater safety circuit interrupts power supply to the fuser heater when the detected
temperature of the main and sub thermistors is abnormal.

Thermoswitch
◦

ENWW

The DC controller interrupts power supply to the fuser heater when it detects an abnormal
temperature of the fuser heater.

The contact of the thermoswitch is broken to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when
the thermoswitch detects an abnormal temperature of the fuser heater.

Engine-control system

19

Low-voltage power supply
The low-voltage power supply (LVPS) converts ac input voltage to dc voltage. The LVPS has two fuses
on the PCA. The LVPS 24 V output is interrupted to the fuser and the high-voltage power supply if the
cartridge-door interlock switch (SW501) is in the off position (cover open).
WARNING! The product power switch only interrupts dc voltage from the LVPS. The ac voltage is
present in the product when the power cord is plugged into a power receptacle and the power switch is
in the off position. You must unplug the product power cord before servicing the product.
Figure 1-13 Low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Engine controller unit
Low-volt age power supply
Fuse(FU1001)

Fuser control
circuit

Noise filter

Fuser

Power-switch
control circuit

Fuse(FU1002)

Noise filter

Power switch
(SW240)

/FDOORSNS

High-volt age
power supply
+24R

+24V generation
circuit

+24V

+3.3V generation
circuit
Protection
circuit

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

+3.3V
DC controller

+24U
+3.3V

+5V generation
circuit

20

Door switch
(SW501)

REM24

+5V

ENWW

Overcurrent/overvoltage protection
The low-voltage power supply has a protective function against overcurrent and overvoltage to prevent
failures in the power supply circuit. If an overcurrent or overvoltage condition occurs, the system
automatically cuts off the output voltage.
If the DC power is not being supplied from the low-voltage power supply, the protective function might
be running. In such case, turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. Do not plug in the power
cord or turn on the power switch again until the cause is found.
WARNING! If you believe the overcurrent or overvoltage protection circuits have been activated, do
not plug in the product power cord or turn on the product power until the cause of the failure is found
and corrected.
In addition, two fuses in the low-voltage power supply protect against overcurrent. If overcurrent flows
into the AC line, the fuses melt and cut off the power distribution.

ENWW

Engine-control system

21

High-voltage power supply
The high-voltage power supply (HVPS) applies biases to the following components:
●

Primary charging roller

●

Developing roller

●

Transfer roller

●

Fusing film

Figure 1-14 High-voltage power supply
Engine controller unit

High-voltage power supply

DC controller

Fuser
Fuser film

Fuser film bias
circuit

FSRB
FILMB

Pressure roller

Cartridge
Primary
charging bias
circuit

PRI

To primary charging roller
To developing roller

Developing
bias circuit

DEV
Photosensitive drum
Transfer roller

Transfer bias
circuit

22

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

TR

ENWW

Formatter
Formatter heartbeat LED
The heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly. While the product is initializing
after you turn the product on, the LED blinks rapidly, and then turns off. When the product has finished
the initialization sequence, the heartbeat LED pulses on and off. For more information abut the heartbeat
LED see Formatter heartbeat LED on page 133.

DIMM slots
CAUTION: Single inline memory modules (SIMMs) used in previous HP LaserJet products are not
compatible with the product.
The formatter has one dual inline memory module (DIMM) slot for upgrading the product with more
memory.
To find out how much memory is installed in the product, print a configuration page. For more information
about memory, see DIMM cover and DIMM on page 57.

ENWW

Engine-control system

23

Laser/scanner system
The laser/scanner system receives VIDEO signals from the ECU and the formatter and converts the
signals into latent images on the photosensitive drum.
The main components of the laser/scanner are the laser unit and the scanner motor unit. The DC
controller sends signals to the laser/scanner to control the functions of these components.
Figure 1-15 Laser/scanner system
Formatter
Engine controller unit

BDI signal

VIDEO signal

SCANNER MOTOR CONTROL signal

LASER CONTROL signal

DC controller

Laser unit

Scanning mirror
BD sensor

Scanner motor unit

Photosensitive drum

24

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

ENWW

Laser failure detection
The DC controller determines an optical unit failure and notifies the formatter, if the laser/scanner
encounters the following conditions:

ENWW

●

The scanner motor does not reach a specified rotation within a specified period of the scanner
motor start up.

●

The rotation of the scanner motor is out of specified range for a specified period during the scanner
motor drive.

●

The BD interval is out of a specified value during a print operation.

Engine-control system

25

Image-formation system
Electrophotographic process
The electrophotographic process forms an image on the paper. Following are the major components
used in the process:
●

Print cartridge

●

Transfer roller

●

Fuser

●

Laser/scanner

The DC controller uses the laser/scanner and HVPS to form the toner image on the photosensitive drum.
The image is transferred to the print media and then fused onto the paper.
Figure 1-16 Electrophotographic process block diagram
Laser beam

Cartridge
Laser scanner

Transfer roller

Fuser

High-voltage power supply

DC controller
Engine controller unit

26

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

ENWW

Image formation process
Each of the following process function independently and must be coordinated with the other product
processes. Image formation consists of the following processes:
●

●

Latent-image formation block
◦

Step 1: primary charging

◦

Step 2: laser-beam exposure

Developing block
◦

●

●

Transfer block
◦

Step 4: transfer

◦

Step 5: separation

Fusing block
◦

●

Step 3: developing

Step 6: fusing

Drum cleaning block
◦

Step 7: drum cleaning

Figure 1-17 Image formation process
: Media path
: Direction of drum rotation
: Block

Latent image formation

: Step
2. Laser-beam exposure

1. Primary charging
3. Developing

Developing

Drum cleaning
7. Drum cleaning

Delivery

6. Fusing (Fixing)
Fusing (Fixing)

ENWW

5. Separation

4. Transfer

Pickup

Transfer

Image-formation system

27

Latent-image formation stage
During the latent-image formation stage, the laser/scanner forms an invisible image on the
photosensitive drum in the print cartridge.
Primary charging
Step 1: DC and AC biases are applied to the primary charging roller, which transfers a uniform negative
potential to the photosensitive drum.
Figure 1-18 Primary charging
Primary charging roller

Photosensitive drum

Primary charging bias

Laser beam exposure
Step 2: The laser beam scans the photosensitive drum to neutralize negative charges on parts of the
drum surface. An electrostatic latent image is formed on the drum where negative charges were
neutralized.
Figure 1-19 Laser beam exposure
Laser beam

Unexposed area

28

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

Exposed area

ENWW

Developing stage
Print cartridge
Step 3: In the print cartridge, the developing cylinder comes in contact with the photosensitive drum to
deposit toner onto the electrostatic latent image.
Figure 1-20 Print cartridge
Blade
Developing roller

Exposed area

Unexposed area

Unexposed area

Exposed area

Developing bias

Photosensitive drum

Toner acquires a negative charge from the friction that occurs when the developing roller rotatesagainst
the developing blade. The developing bias is applied to the developing roller to make a potential
difference between the developing roller and the photosensitive drum. The negatively charged toner is
attracted to the latent image on the photosensitive drum because the drum surface has a higher
potential.

ENWW

Image-formation system

29

Transfer stage
Step 4: The transfer charging roller, to which a DC positive bias is applied, imparts a positive charge
on the print media. When the print media comes in contact with the photosensitive drum, the toner is
transferred to the print media.
Figure 1-21 Transfer

Photosensitive
drum

Media
Transfer roller

Transfer bias

Step 5: The elasticity of the print media causes its separation from the photosensitive drum. A static
charge eliminator aids separation by weakening any electrostatic adhesion.
Figure 1-22 Separation

Photosensitive
drum

Media
Static charge eliminator
Transfer roller

Fusing stage
Step 6: The DC negative bias applied to the fusing film strengthens the holding force of the toner on the
print media and prevents the toner from scattering.

30

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

ENWW

The product uses an on-demand fuser method. The toner image is permanently affixed to the printing
paper by heat and pressure.
Figure 1-23 Fusing
Fuser heater

Brush

Fuser film
Toner

Media
Pressure roller

Fuser bias

Cleaning stage
Step 7: The cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off of the photosensitive drum and deposits it into
the waste toner case.
Figure 1-24 Drum cleaning
Cleaning blade

Toner collection box

ENWW

Photosensitive
drum

Image-formation system

31

Toner detection
The product uses a nonvolatile memory tag built into the print cartridge. Print-cartridge detection
happens when the engine controller detects the presence of a genuine HP print-cartridge that contains
a memory tag. Toner detection happens as the engine controller reads or writes the data that is stored
on the memory tag. The engine controller renews the information in the prescribed timing and reads or
writes it from or to the memory tag.
The engine controller commands the memory tag to read or write with the following conditions:
●

●

Read
◦

Power is on

◦

The cartridge door is closed

◦

A command is received from the formatter

Write
◦

A page of media is printed

◦

A command is received from the formatter

When the engine controller fails to read or write three times in a row, it determines that the memory tag
is abnormal and sends a cartridge memory abnormality warning to the formatter.
Figure 1-25 Print cartridge memory tag

32

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

ENWW

Pickup, feed, and delivery system
The pickup/feed/delivery system consists of several types of feed rollers and sensors. The ECU uses
a motor and two solenoids to drive the rollers. Three media-detection sensors detect paper as it passes
through the product. If media does not reach or pass each sensor within a specified time, the ECU
determines that a jam has occurred and alerts the formatter.

Paper trays
The product has the following paper trays:

ENWW

●

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray; all models)

●

Tray 2 (500-sheet tray; all models)

●

Tray 3 (optional 500-sheet input tray; HP LaserJet P3015x)

●

Tray 4 (optional 500-sheet input tray)

Pickup, feed, and delivery system

33

Photo sensors and switches
Figure 1-26 Photo sensors and switches (product)
PS4
PS1
M8001
SW501
PS8001

SL1
PS2

PS225

PS215

PS205

PS502
M8002

SL2
PS3

SW235

Table 1-10 Photo sensors and switches (product)

34

Item

Description

Item

Description

PS1

Face-up sensor

PS215

Top-of-Page (TOP) sensor

PS2

Fuser delivery sensor

PS225

Media width sensor

PS3

Cassette media-presence sensor

PS502

Duplex media-feed sensor (duplex models only)

PS4

Face-down tray media-full sensor

PS8001

Rear door sensor

PS205

Tray 1 (MP tray) media-presence sensor

SW235

Cassette presence sensor

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

ENWW

Figure 1-27 Photo sensors and switches (Tray 3 and Tray 4)
M8001

CL1

SL3

PS8008

PS451

SW461

Table 1-11 Photo sensors and switches (Tray 3 and Tray 4)

1

ENWW

Item

Description

PS451

Paper feeder cassette-media presence sensor

PS8008

Paper feeder media-feed sensor

SW461

Paper feeder cassette presence switch

Tray 3 and Tray 4 are identical 500-sheet input trays.

Pickup, feed, and delivery system

35

Solenoids and clutches
Figure 1-28 Solenoids and clutches (product)
PS4
PS1
M8001
SW501
PS8001

SL1
PS2

PS225

PS215

PS205

PS502
M8002

SL2
PS3

SW235

Table 1-12 Solenoids and clutches (product)

36

Item

Description

SL1

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup solenoid

SL2

Cassette (Tray 2) pickup solenoid

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

ENWW

Figure 1-29 Solenoids and clutches (Tray 3 and Tray 4)
M8001

CL1

SL3
PS451

PS8008

SW461

Table 1-13 Solenoids and clutches (Tray 3 and Tray 4)

1

ENWW

Item

Description

SL3

Paper feeder pickup solenoid

CL1

Paper feeder pickup clutch

Tray 3 and Tray 4 are identical 500-sheet input trays.

Pickup, feed, and delivery system

37

Tray 1 or Tray 2
Pickup and feed unit
The pickup and feed unit uses the following components and processes.

Cassette paper size detection/cassette paper detection
NOTE: To find the following components, see Photo sensors and switches on page 34.
●

PS3; cassette media-presence sensor

●

PS225; media width sensor (detects media width after the media enters the paper path)

Cassette pickup
NOTE: To find the following components, see Solenoids and clutches on page 36.
●

SL2; cassette (Tray 2) pickup solenoid

Tray 1 paper pickup
NOTE: To find the following components, see Photo sensors and switches on page 34 and Solenoids
and clutches on page 36.

38

●

PS205; Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) media-presence sensor

●

SL1; Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup solenoid

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

ENWW

Paper pickup and feed
The following figure shows the pickup and feed paper path.
NOTE: Duplex models include a duplex media-feed path for automatic two-sided printing.
Figure 1-30 Pickup, feed, and delivery block diagram
Delivery roller

Fuser film

Pressure roller

Photosensitive drum

Transfer roller

Cassette pickup roller

MP tray pickup roller

MP tray separation pad

Cassette separation pad

Simplex media path
Duplex mediaath
p

ENWW

Tray 1 or Tray 2

39

Jam detection
The product uses the following sensors to detect the presence of media and to check for jams. If media
does not reach or pass each sensor within a specified time, the ECU determines that a jam has occurred
and alerts the formatter.
NOTE: To find the following components, see Photo sensors and switches on page 34.
●

PS2; fuser delivery sensor

●

PS4; face-down tray media-full sensor

●

PS215; Top-of-Page (TOP) sensor

●

PS225; media width sensor

●

PS502; duplex media-feed sensor (duplex models only)

●

PS8008; paper feeder media-feed sensor
NOTE: PS8008 is used in Tray 3 and Tray 4.

The product detects the following jams:

40

●

Pickup delay jam

●

Pickup stationary jam

●

Delivery delay jam

●

Delivery stationary jam

●

Fuser wrapping jam

●

Door open jam

●

Residual media jam

●

Duplex repickup jam (duplex models only)

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

ENWW

Additional tray
NOTE: This product supports identical 500-sheet input trays (Tray 3 and Tray 4).

Tray driver PCA
The following figure shows the signals between the DC controller and the tray driver PCA.
Figure 1-31 Tray 3 and Tray 4 driver PCA block diagram
Optional paper feeder
Clutch
+24V
DC controller

Paper feeder
connector PCB

Solenoid

Photointerrupter
Switch

ENWW

Additional tray

41

Paper pickup and feed
NOTE: Tray 3 and Tray 4 are identical 500-sheet input trays.
The following figure shows the pickup and feed paper path (Tray 3 shown).
Figure 1-32 Tray 3 and Tray 4 pickup, feed, and delivery block diagram

Optional paper feeder
separation pad
Optional paper feeder
pickup roller

42

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

Optional paper feeder
feed roller

ENWW

Media level and size detection
●

PS451; paper feeder media-presence sensor detects if media is present in the tray.
NOTE: PS451 is used in Tray 3 and Tray 4.

●

Media size is detected after the page enters the product. See Cassette paper size detection/
cassette paper detection on page 38.

Jam detection
●

ENWW

PS8008; paper feeder media-feed sensor detects jams in the paper feeder.

Additional tray

43

44

Chapter 1 Theory of operation

ENWW

2

ENWW

Removal and replacement

●

Removal and replacement strategy

●

Service approach

●

Removal and replacement procedures

45

Removal and replacement strategy
General cautions during removal and replacement
This chapter describes the removal and replacement of field-replaceable units (FRUs) only.
Replacing FRUs is generally the reverse of removal. Occasionally, notes and tips are included to provide
directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures.
HP does not support repairing individual subassemblies or troubleshooting to the component level.
WARNING! Turn the product off, wait 5 seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting
to service the product. If this warning is not followed, severe injury can result, in addition to damage to
the product. The power must be on for certain functional checks during troubleshooting. However,
disconnect the power supply during parts removal.
Never operate or service the product with the protective cover removed from the laser/scanner
assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes.
The sheet-metal parts can have sharp edges. Be careful when handling sheet-metal parts.
CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the flat flexible cables (FFCs) during removal or installation. Also, do
not straighten prefolds in the FFCs. You must fully seat all FFCs in their connectors. Failure to fully seat
an FFC into a connector can cause a short circuit in a PCA.
Incorrectly routed or loose wire harnesses can interfere with other internal components and can become
damaged or broken. Frayed or pinched harness wires can be difficult to find. When replacing wire
harnesses, always use the provided wire loops, lance points, or wire-harness guides and retainers.
NOTE: To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counterclockwise to align it with the thread pattern,
and then carefully turn it clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. If a self-tapping screw-hole becomes
stripped, repair the screw-hole or replace the affected assembly.
Note the length, diameter, color, type, and location of each screw. Be sure to return each screw to its
original location during reassembly.
TIP: For clarity, some photos in this chapter might show components removed that would not be
removed to service the product. If necessary, remove the components listed at the beginning of a
procedure before proceeding to service the product.

Electrostatic discharge
CAUTION:

Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder

when removing product parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat, or
use an ESD strap. If an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the
sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the product.

Required tools

46

●

#2 Phillips 152 mm (6 in) screwdriver with magnetic tip

●

#2 Phillips 76 mm (3 in) screwdriver with magnetic tip

●

Small flat blade screwdriver

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

●

Small needle-nose pliers

●

ESD mat

●

Penlight

CAUTION: Always use a Phillips screwdriver (callout 1). Do not use a pozidrive screwdriver (callout 2)
or any motorized screwdriver. These can damage screws or screw threads.
Figure 2-1 Phillips and pozidrive screwdriver comparison

Types of screws
NOTE: The illustration in this section are for reference only. The screws in your product might look
slightly different.
Illustration

ENWW

Description

Size

Part number

Use

Screw with washer

M3X6

XB2-7300-000CN

Used to secure metal
components to metal
components (for
example, a ground wire
to the frame)

Screw, tapping

M3X6

XA9-1503-000CN

Screw

D-M3X6

XA9-1671-000CN

Screw

P-M3X8

XB4-5300-807CN

Screw, tapping, truss
head

M4X10

XB4-7401-005CN

Used to secure
anything to plastic

Removal and replacement strategy

47

Service approach
Product repair normally begins by using the product internal diagnostics and the following two-step
process:
1.

Isolate the problem to the major system (for example, the network or server, or the product).

2.

Troubleshoot the problem by using the procedures in chapter 6.

After you find a faulty part, the product can usually be repaired at the assembly level by replacing fieldreplaceable units (FRUs). Some mechanical assemblies might need to be repaired at the subassembly
level.

Before performing service
●

Remove all media from the product.

●

Turn off the power using the power switch.

●

Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.

●

Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an
ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

●

Remove the print cartridges. See Print cartridge on page 52.

●

Remove the tray cassette or cassettes. See Tray cassette (Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4)
on page 54.

After performing service
●

Plug in the power cable.

●

Reinstall the print cartridges.

●

Reinstall the tray cassette or cassettes.

●

If an optional paper feeder was installed, place the product on the feeder.

Post-service test
Perform the following test to verify that the repair or replacement was successful.

Print-quality test

48

1.

Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.

2.

Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.

3.

Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.

4.

Verify that the expected start-up sounds occur.

5.

Print a configuration page, and then verify that the expected printing sounds occur.

6.

Print a demo page, and then verify that the print quality is as expected.

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

ENWW

7.

Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.

8.

If necessary, restore any customer-specified settings.

9.

Clean the outside of the product with a damp cloth.

Service approach

49

Parts removal order
Figure 2-2 Parts removal order (1 of 2)
Component
Print cartridges
Tray cassette (Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4)
Sub cover
DIMM cover and DIMM
Formatter cover and formatter PCA
Rear-door assembly
Left Cover
Right-rear cover
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) cover
Cartridge door assembly
Top-right cover
Control panel
Front-right and right-side cover assembly
Lower-right cover and bracket

Rear-door assembly

Top cover

Remove

Remove

Remove

Remove

Remove

Remove

Top-right cover

Control panel

DIMM cover

Rear-door assembly
Rear-door assembly
DIMM cover
DIMM cover
DIMM cover

Left Cover
Left Cover
Formatter cover
Formatter cover
Formatter cover

DIMM cover

Formatter cover

Top-cover assembly
Control panel

DIMM cover

Formatter cover

Rear-door assembly

Front-right
and right-side
cover assembly
Left Cover

USB port PCA

DIMM cover

Formatter cover

Top-right cover

Control panel

Front-right
and right-side
cover assembly

Power-switch assembly

DIMM cover

Formatter cover

Top-right cover

Control panel

Top-right cover

Control panel

Front-right
and right-side
cover assembly
Front-right
and right-side
cover assembly

Tray 1 cover

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup roller
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) separation pad
Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 pickup roller
Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 separation pad
Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 base-plate roller assembly
Transfer roller

50

Main Fan, fan duct, and environmental sensor

DIMM cover

Formatter cover

Fuser

Rear-door assembly

Right-rear cover

Registration assembly
Duplex media-feed guide
Laser/scanner assembly

Rear-door assembly
Rear-door assembly
DIMM cover

Right-rear cover
Formatter cover

Rear-door assembly

Left Cover

Top-right cover

Control panel

Engine control unit (ECU)

DIMM cover

Formatter cover

Rear-door assembly

Left Cover

Top-right cover

Control panel

Cassette pickup (Tray 2) solenoid
or Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup solenoid

DIMM cover

Formatter cover

Rear-door assembly

Left Cover

Top-right cover

Control panel

Pickup assembly

DIMM cover

Formatter cover

Rear-door assembly

Left Cover

Top-right cover

Control panel

Fuser motor

DIMM cover

Formatter cover

Rear-door assembly

Left Cover

Top-right cover

Control panel

Sub fan and fan duct

DIMM cover

Formatter cover

Rear-door assembly

Left Cover

Top-right cover

Control panel

High-voltage power supply

DIMM cover

Formatter cover

Rear-door assembly

Left Cover

Top-right cover

Control panel

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

Left Cover

ENWW

Figure 2-3 Parts removal order (2 of 2)

Remove

Remove

Remove

Remove

Front-right
and right-side
cover assembly

Lower-right
cover and bracket

Top cover

Power-switch
assembly

Front-right
and right-side
cover assembly

Lower-right
cover and bracket

Top cover

Power-switch
assembly

Front-right
and right-side
cover assembly

Lower-right
cover and bracket

Top cover

Power-switch
assembly

Front-right
and right-side
cover assembly

Lower-right
cover and bracket

Top cover

Power-switch
assembly

Front-right
and right-side
cover assembly

Lower-right
cover and bracket

Top cover

Power-switch
assembly

Front-right
and right-side
cover assembly

Lower-right
cover and bracket

Top cover

Power-switch
assembly

Remove

Remove

Remove

Engine control
unit (ECU)

Sub fan and fan duct

Top cover

ENWW

Engine control
unit (ECU)
Engine control
unit (ECU)

Engine control
unit (ECU)
Engine control
unit (ECU)

Duplex
media-feed
guide (duplex
models only)

Service approach

51

Removal and replacement procedures
Print cartridge, cassettes, and sub cover
Print cartridge
CAUTION: If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water.
Hot water sets toner into fabric.
1.

Press the cartridge-door release button, and then open the cartridge door. Make sure that the door
is completely open.
Figure 2-4 Remove the print cartridge (1 of 2)

52

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

2.

Grasp the print-cartridge handle and pull it out of the product.
CAUTION: Do not touch the green roller. Doing so can damage the cartridge. Do not expose the
cartridge to strong light. Cover the cartridge with a sheet of paper to protect it from light.
Reinstallation tip Align the print cartridge with its slot and insert the print cartridge until it clicks
into place.
Figure 2-5 Remove the print cartridge (2 of 2)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

53

Tray cassette (Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4)
NOTE: Use this procedure to remove the Tray 2 or optional Tray 3 or Tray 4 cassette.
1.

Pull the tray straight out of the product until it stops.
Figure 2-6 Remove the tray cassette (1 of 2)

2.

Carefully lift up on the tray to release it, and then remove the tray.
Figure 2-7 Remove the tray cassette (2 of 2)

54

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Sub cover
NOTE: Duplex models only. The space under the sub cover is used by third-party manufacturers to
install optional devices for this product (for example, a security card reader).
Use a small flat blade screwdriver to carefully separate the sub cover from the product.
CAUTION: There are two tabs along the each of the long edges of the cover that fasten the cover to
the product. Do not breack the tabs when the cover is removed.
Figure 2-8 Remove the sub cover

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

55

External panels, covers, doors, formatter PCA, DIMM, and EIO disk
EIO disk
WARNING!
1.

ESD sensitive component.

Loosen two thumb screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-9 Remove the EIO disk (1 of 2)

1

2.

Pull the EIO disk straight out of the product to remove it.
Figure 2-10 Remove the EIO disk (2 of 2)

56

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

DIMM cover and DIMM
WARNING!
1.

ESD sensitive component.

Slide the DIMM cover toward the back of the product to release it.
Figure 2-11 Remove the DIMM cover and DIMM (1 of 3)

2.

Lift the cover away from the product.
Figure 2-12 Remove the DIMM cover and DIMM (2 of 3)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

57

3.

Release two tabs (callout 1) and rotate the top of the DIMM away from the formatter. Lift up on the
DIMM to remove it.
Figure 2-13 Remove the DIMM cover and DIMM (3 of 3)

1
O

X
O
X XO XOXOXO
O
X X X
O O O
X
O XO XO XO
X
X
O X
X OX O
O
X O
O
X
O
XO
X
X
O
XO
O
X
X
O
XO
X
XO
O
O
X
XO
X
XO
X
O
O
O
XO
X
XO
X
O
O
XO
XO
X
O
XO
XO
XO
XO XO
XO
XO
XIXO
XIOXIO
XIOXIO

XIOXIO

XIXO
XIOXIO

OXIXO

OXIXO

OXIXO

OXIXO

XIXO
XIOXIO

XIXO
XIOXIO

XIOXIO

XOXO
XO

XIOXIO

X
O
X
O
X

XO
XO
XO

Reinstall the DIMM
1.

Position the DIMM at an angle to the DIMM slot, and rotate the top of the DIMM toward the formatter.
Figure 2-14 Reinstall the DIMM (1 of 2)

58

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

2.

Push down to seat it in the DIMM slot. The DIMM must snap into the locking tabs on the DIMM
slot.
Figure 2-15 Reinstall the DIMM (2 of 2)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

59

Formatter cover and formatter PCA
WARNING!

ESD sensitive component.

1.

Remove the DIMM cover. See DIMM cover and DIMM on page 57.

2.

Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover toward the back of the product
to release it.
Figure 2-16 Remove the formatter cover and formatter PCA (1 of 4)

1

3.

Lift the cover away from the product.
Figure 2-17 Remove the formatter cover and formatter PCA (2 of 4)

60

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

4.

Disconnect three connectors (callout 1; J14, J17, and J16) and one FFC (callout 2; J18).
Figure 2-18 Remove the formatter cover and formatter PCA (3 of 4)

1

5.

2

Remove seven screws (callout 1), and then carefully remove the formatter PCA.
Figure 2-19 Remove the formatter cover and formatter PCA (4 of 4)

1

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

61

Rear-door assembly
1.

Open the rear door.
Figure 2-20 Remove the rear-door assembly (1 of 8)

2.

Gently pull down on the door and lower the door until it is fully open.
Figure 2-21 Remove the rear-door assembly (2 of 8)

62

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

3.

Push up on the link arm to release it.
CAUTION: The link arm is under spring tension. Do not let the link arm snap back toward the
product when you release it.
Figure 2-22 Remove the rear-door assembly (3 of 8)

4.

Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-23 Remove the rear-door assembly (4 of 8)

1

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

63

5.

Open the lower-rear door, and then release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 2-24 Remove the rear-door assembly (5 of 8)

1

6.

Release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 2-25 Remove the rear-door assembly (6 of 8)

1

64

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

7.

Rotate the bottom of the rear-door assembly away from the product.
Figure 2-26 Remove the rear-door assembly (7 of 8)

8.

Pull down on the rear-door assembly to remove it.
Figure 2-27 Remove the rear-door assembly (8 of 8)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

65

Left cover
1.

Remove the rear-door assembly. See Rear-door assembly on page 62.

2.

Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 2-28 Remove the left cover (1 of 4)

1

3.

Release three tabs (callout 1).
TIP: The tab inside the cassette cavity is located below the plastic cassette rail. It might be easier
if slightly lift up the left side of the product, and use a small flat blade screwdriver to release this
tab.
Figure 2-29 Remove the left cover (2 of 4)

1

66

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

4.

Release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 2-30 Remove the left cover (3 of 4)

1

5.

Rotate the rear of the cover slightly away from the product, and then slide the cover toward the
front of the product to remove it.
Figure 2-31 Remove the left cover (4 of 4)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

67

Right-rear cover
1.

Remove the rear-door assembly. See Rear-door assembly on page 62.

2.

Slide the right-rear cover toward the inside of the product to release it.
Figure 2-32 Remove the right-rear cover (1 of 2)

3.

Rotate the bottom of the cover away from the product, and then pull down on the cover to remove
it.
Figure 2-33 Remove the right-rear cover (2 of 2)

68

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) cover
1.

2.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:
●

Rear-door assembly. See Rear-door assembly on page 62.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 66.

Carefully release two retaining arms (callout 1).
Figure 2-34 Remove Tray 1 cover (1 of 3)

1

3.

Slightly lower the cover, and then slide it toward the left side of the product.
TIP: If you lower the tray too far, it will not slide off of the hinge pins.
Figure 2-35 Remove Tray 1 cover (2 of 3)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

69

4.

Remove the Tray 1 cover.
Figure 2-36 Remove Tray 1 cover (3 of 3)

70

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Cartridge-door assembly
1.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:
●

Rear-door assembly. See Rear-door assembly on page 62.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 66.

●

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) cover. See Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) cover on page 69.
TIP: The cartridge-door assembly can be removed without removing the Tray 1 cover.
However, it is easier to remove and reinstall the door assembly when the Tray 1 cover is not
installed.

2.

Remove one spring (callout 1).
Figure 2-37 Remove the cartridge-door assembly (1 of 3)

1

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

71

3.

Slightly slide the assembly toward the left side of the product to release it from the hinge pins.
CAUTION: Do not damage the plastic link arm (callout 1).
Figure 2-38 Remove the cartridge-door assembly (2 of 3)

1

4.

Rotate the assembly down, and then separate the plastic link arm (callout 1) from the assembly.
Remove the cartridge-door assembly.
Figure 2-39 Remove the cartridge-door assembly (3 of 3)

1

72

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Top-right cover
1.

2.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:
●

DIMM cover. See DIMM cover and DIMM on page 57.

●

Formatter cover. See Formatter cover and formatter PCA on page 60.

Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-40 Remove the top-right cover (1 of 2)

1

3.

Lift the cover off of the product to remove it.
Figure 2-41 Remove the top-right cover (2 of 2)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

73

Control panel
WARNING!
1.

2.

ESD sensitive component.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:
●

DIMM cover. See DIMM cover and DIMM on page 57.

●

Formatter cover. See Formatter cover and formatter PCA on page 60.

Press the cartridge-door release button, and then open the cartridge door. Make sure that the door
is completely open.
Figure 2-42 Remove the control panel (1 of 4)

3.

Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).
Figure 2-43 Remove the control panel (2 of 4)

1

2

74

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

4.

Slide the control panel toward the front of the product to release it.
Figure 2-44 Remove the control panel (3 of 4)

5.

Lift the control panel off of the product.
Figure 2-45 Remove the control panel (4 of 4)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

75

Front-right and right-side cover assembly
1.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:
●

DIMM cover. See DIMM cover and DIMM on page 57.

●

Formatter cover. See Formatter cover and formatter PCA on page 60.

●

Cartridge-door assembly. See Cartridge-door assembly on page 71.
NOTE: The figures in this section show the cartridge-door assembly installed. However, it
might be easier to reinstall the front-right and right-side cover assembly if the cartridge-door
assembly is removed.

●
2.

Control panel. See Control panel on page 74.

Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-46 Remove the front-right and right-side cover assembly (1 of 6)

1

76

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

3.

Disconnect one connector (callout 1; J14), release the wire harness from the guide (callout 2), and
then remove two screws (callout 3).
Figure 2-47 Remove the front-right and right-side cover assembly (2 of 6)

3

4.

2

1

Slightly push the cover assembly toward the front of the product to release it, and then carefully
rotate the cover away from the product.
CAUTION: Do not damage the covers or the cartridge-door assembly (if you did not remove it)
when you rotate the cover assembly away from the product.
Do not dislodge the power-switch assembly (callout 1) when you rotate the cover assembly away
from the product.
Figure 2-48 Remove the front-right and right-side cover assembly (3 of 6)

1

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

77

5.

Remove the cover assembly.
Reinstallation tip The figures in this section show the cartridge-door assembly installed.
However, it might be easier to reinstall the front-right and right-side cover assembly if the cartridgedoor assembly is removed. See Cartridge-door assembly on page 71.
Figure 2-49 Remove the front-right and right-side cover assembly (4 of 6)

6.

If necessary, remove two screws (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then slide the frontright cover toward the top of the right-side cover to release it.
Figure 2-50 Remove the front-right and right-side cover assembly (5 of 6)

1

78

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

2

ENWW

7.

If necessary, separate the front-right cover from the right-side cover.
Figure 2-51 Remove the front-right and right-side cover assembly (6 of 6)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

79

Lower-right cover and bracket
NOTE: You do not need to remove the sheet-metal bracket to remove the lower-right cover. However,
you must remove the bracket and the cover when removing some of the other product components in
this chapter. Use this procedure to remove the cover only, or the cover and the bracket.
1.

2.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:
●

DIMM cover. See DIMM cover and DIMM on page 57.

●

Formatter cover and Formatter PCA. See Formatter cover and formatter PCA on page 60.

●

Top-right cover. See Top-right cover on page 73.

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 74.

●

Front-right and right-side cover assembly. See Front-right and right-side cover assembly
on page 76.

To remove the cover and the bracket: Remove three screws (callout 1).
To remove the bracket only: Remove one screw (the bottom most screw in callout 1).
Figure 2-52 Remove the lower-right cover (1 of 4)

1

80

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

3.

To remove the bracket only:: Slide the sheet-metal bracket up to release it, and then remove the
bracket.
NOTE: You might need to slightly pull outward on the lower-right cover (callout 1) to release the
sheet-metal bracket.
Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the bracket, make sure that the tab (callout 2) is engaged
in the slot in the chassis.
Figure 2-53 Remove the lower-right cover (2 of 4)

2

1

4.

Raise the right side of the product, slide the lower-right cover toward the back of the product, and
then rotate the cover away from the product.
Figure 2-54 Remove the lower-right cover (3 of 4)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

81

5.

Remove the lower-right cover.
Figure 2-55 Remove the lower-right cover (4 of 4)

Reinstall the lower-right cover
1.

Carefully raise the right side of the product, find the three slots in the chassis (callout 1), and the
three tabs (callout 2) along the bottom of the cover.
Figure 2-56 Reinstall the lower-right cover (1 of 2)

1

2

82

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

2.

Rotate the cover up to engage the tabs with the slots, and then slide the cover toward the front of
the product to install it.
Figure 2-57 Remove the lower-right cover (2 of 2)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

83

Top cover
1.

2.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:
●

DIMM cover. See DIMM cover and DIMM on page 57.

●

Formatter cover. See Formatter cover and formatter PCA on page 60.

●

Rear-door assembly. See Rear-door assembly on page 62.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 66.

●

Top-right cover. See Top-right cover on page 73.

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 74.

Remove three screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-58 Remove the top cover (1 of 2)

1

84

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

3.

Slightly raise the rear of the cover, slide the cover toward the front of the product, and then remove
it.
Figure 2-59 Remove the top cover (2 of 2)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

85

Main assemblies
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup roller
CAUTION: Do not touch the surface of the roller. Skin oils deposited on the roller might cause printquality problems.
1.

Press the cartridge-door release button, and then open the cartridge door. Make sure that the door
is completely open.
Figure 2-60 Remove the Tray 1 (MP tray) pickup roller (1 of 2)

2.

Release two tabs, and then rotate the roller out and away from the product to remove it.
TIP: It might be easier to release the tabs by using a small flat blade screwdriver.
Figure 2-61 Remove the Tray 1 (MP tray) pickup roller (2 of 2)

86

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) separation pad
CAUTION: Do not touch the surface of the pad. Skin oils deposited on the roller might cause paperhandling problems.
1.

Press the cartridge-door release button, and then open the cartridge door. Make sure that the door
is completely open.
Figure 2-62 Remove the Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) separation pad (1 of 2)

2.

Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the separation pad.
Figure 2-63 Remove the Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) separation pad (2 of 2)

1

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

87

Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 pickup roller
CAUTION: Do not touch the surface of the roller. Skin oils deposited on the roller might cause printquality problems.
NOTE: If you did not remove the Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 cassette before servicing the product, remove
it now.
1.

Carefully place the product front-side up, so that you can see into the opening where the cassette
would be installed.
NOTE: Debris can scratch or damage the back of the product. Before you place the product frontside up, remove any debris from the work surface. If possible, set the product on a clean, dry cloth
to prevent scratching and damage.

2.

Release the roller bushing, rotate the busing up, and then slide the bushing off of the roller shaft.
Figure 2-64 Remove the Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 pickup roller (1 of 3)

88

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

3.

Carefully remove the black-plastic guard (callout 1).
CAUTION: The guard is partially retained by the bushing removed in the previous step. Do not
lose the guard when the bushing is removed.
Figure 2-65 Remove the Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 pickup roller (2 of 3)

1

4.

Slide the roller toward the left side of the product, rotate the right end of the roller away from the
product, and then remove the roller assembly.
Figure 2-66 Remove the Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 pickup roller (3 of 3)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

89

Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 separation pad
CAUTION: Do not touch the surface of the pad. Skin oils deposited on the roller might cause paperhandling problems.
1.

Remove the tray cassette. See Tray cassette (Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4) on page 54.

2.

Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the separation pad (callout 2).
Figure 2-67 Remove the Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 separation pad

2

1

90

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 base-plate roller assembly
1.

Remove the tray cassette. See Tray cassette (Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4) on page 54.

2.

Locate the base roller assembly (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the assembly
toward the outside of the product to release it.
Figure 2-68 Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 base plate roller assembly (1 of 2)

2

1
3.

Remove the base roller assembly.
Figure 2-69 Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 base plate roller assembly (2 of 2)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

91

Transfer roller
CAUTION: Do not touch the black-sponge portion of the transfer roller. Skin oils deposited on the
transfer roller might cause print-quality problems.
1.

Press the cartridge-door release button, and then open the cartridge door. Make sure that the door
is completely open.
NOTE: If you did not remove the print cartridge before servicing the product, remove it now.
Figure 2-70 Remove the transfer roller (1 of 3)

2.

Release two tabs (callout 1) at the left end of the roller, slightly lift the end of the roller up, and then
slide the roller (callout 2) toward the left to release it. Remove the roller.
Figure 2-71 Remove the transfer roller (2 of 3)

1

2

92

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

3.

If necessary, remove the gear, the bushing, and the spring, and then install them on a replacement
roller.
Figure 2-72 Remove the transfer roller (3 of 3)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

93

USB port PCA
WARNING!
1.

2.

ESD sensitive component.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:
●

DIMM cover. See DIMM cover and DIMM on page 57.

●

Formatter cover. See Formatter cover and formatter PCA on page 60.

●

Top-right cover. See Top-right cover on page 73.

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 74.

●

Front-right and right-side cover assembly. See Front-right and right-side cover assembly
on page 76.

Release the wire harness (callout 1) from the retainers (callout 2).
Figure 2-73 Remove the USB port PCA (1 of 3)

2

94

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

1

ENWW

3.

Remove on screw (callout 1).
Figure 2-74 Remove the USB port PCA (2 of 3)

1

4.

Carefully remove the USB port PCA.
Figure 2-75 Remove the USB port PCA (3 of 3)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

95

Power-switch assembly
WARNING!
1.

2.

ESD sensitive component.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:
●

DIMM cover. See DIMM cover and DIMM on page 57.

●

Formatter cover. See Formatter cover and formatter PCA on page 60.

●

Top-right cover. See Top-right cover on page 73.

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 74.

●

Front-right and right-side cover assembly. See Front-right and right-side cover assembly
on page 76.

Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).
Figure 2-76 Remove the power-switch assembly (1 of 2)

1

2

96

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

3.

Remove the power-switch assembly.
Figure 2-77 Remove the power-switch assembly (2 of 2)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

97

Main fan, fan duct, and environmental sensor
WARNING!

ESD sensitive component.

Use the steps in this procedure to remove only the environmental sensor, or the sensor and the main
fan.
1.

2.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:
●

DIMM cover. See DIMM cover and DIMM on page 57.

●

Formatter cover. See Formatter cover and formatter PCA on page 60.

●

Top-right cover. See Top-right cover on page 73.

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 74.

●

Front-right and right-side cover assembly. See Front-right and right-side cover assembly
on page 76.

To remove the main fan, fan duct, and the environmental sensor: Disconnect two connectors
(callout 1 and callout 2), and then release the wire harnesses from the retainers (callout 3).
To remove the environmental sensor only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and release
the wire harness from the retainers (callout 3).
Figure 2-78 Remove the main fan, fan duct, and the environmental sensor PCA (1 of 3)

2
3

1

98

Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

3.

Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the environmental sensor (callout 2).
Figure 2-79 Remove the main fan, fan duct, and the environmental sensor PCA (2 of 3)

2

1

4.

To remove the main fan only: Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the main fan.
To remove the main fan and fan duct: Remove one screw (callout 2), and then remove the main
fan and fan duct together.
Reinstallation tip If only the main fan was removed: When the fan is reinstalled, the air must
flow into the product. Make sure that the label side of the fan is toward the inside of the product
when the fan is reinstalled.
Figure 2-80 Remove the main fan, fan duct, and the environmental sensor PCA (3 of 3)

2

1

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures

99

Fuser
1.

2.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:
●

Rear-door assembly. See Rear-door assembly on page 62.

●

Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 68.

Duplex models only: Release two tabs (callout 1) on the duplex media-feed guide, and then slide
the guide toward the back of the product to remove it.
Reinstallation tip Make sure that both tabs snap back into place when reinstalling the duplex
media-feed guide.
Figure 2-81 Remove the fuser (1 of 4)

1

3.

Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), and release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).
Figure 2-82 Remove the fuser (2 of 4)

1

2

100 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

4.

Remove four screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-83 Removing the fuser (3 of 4)

1

5.

Pull the fuser out of the back of the product.
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the fuser, the cartridge-door assembly must be closed before you
remove the fuser.
Figure 2-84 Removing the fuser (4 of 4)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures 101

Registration assembly
1.

2.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:
●

Rear-door assembly. See Rear-door assembly on page 62.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 66.

Unhook the clasp on the registration assembly gear (callout 1), and then slide the gear off of the
shaft.
Figure 2-85 Remove the registration assembly (1 of 3)

1

3.

Open the cartridge door, and then remove four screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-86 Remove the registration assembly (2 of 3)

1

102 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

4.

Lift the registration assembly out of the product, gear-end first.
Figure 2-87 Removing the registration assembly (3 of 3)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures 103

Duplex media-feed assembly
Duplex models only.
1.

2.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:
●

Rear-door assembly. See Rear-door assembly on page 62.

●

Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 68.

Release two tabs (callout 1) on the duplex media-feed guide, and then slide the guide toward the
back of the product to remove it.
Reinstallation tip Make sure that both tabs snap back into place when reinstalling the duplex
media-feed guide.
Figure 2-88 Remove the duplex media-feed assembly (1 of 5)

1

104 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

3.

Press the green lever (callout 1) to release the duplex media-feed assembly.
Figure 2-89 Remove the duplex media-feed assembly (2 of 5)

1

4.

Use a small flat blade screwdriver to carefully pry the sheet-metal tab on the assembly away from
the hinge pin to release it.
Figure 2-90 Remove the duplex media-feed assembly (3 of 5)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures 105

5.

Slide the assembly away from the other hinge pin to release it.
Figure 2-91 Remove the duplex media-feed assembly (4 of 5)

6.

Pull the duplex media-feed assembly out of the back of the product.
Figure 2-92 Remove the duplex media-feed assembly (5 of 5)

106 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Laser/scanner
WARNING!
1.

2.

ESD sensitive component.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:
●

DIMM cover. See DIMM cover and DIMM on page 57.

●

Formatter cover. See Formatter cover and formatter PCA on page 60.

●

Rear-door assembly. See Rear-door assembly on page 62.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 66.

●

Top-right cover. See Top-right cover on page 73.

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 74.

●

Top cover. See Top cover on page 84.

Release one tab (callout 1) on the air duct, and then lift the air duct (callout 2) out of the product.
Figure 2-93 Remove the laser/scanner (1 of 5)

1
2

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures 107

3.

Remove the antistatic sponge (callout 1).
Figure 2-94 Remove the laser/scanner (2 of 5)

1

4.

Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and one FFC (callout 2).
Reinstallation tip Make sure that you correctly reconnect the FFC when the laser/scanner is
installed. If the FFC is not correctly reconnected, a 51.1 ERROR will appear on the control-panel
display.
Figure 2-95 Remove the laser/scanner (3 of 5)

1

108 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

2

ENWW

5.

Remove four screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-96 Remove the laser/scanner (4 of 5)

1

6.

Lift the laser/scanner up and out of the product.
Figure 2-97 Remove the laser/scanner (5 of 5)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures 109

Engine control unit (ECU)
WARNING!
1.

ESD sensitive component.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:
●

DIMM cover. See DIMM cover and DIMM on page 57.

●

Formatter cover and formatter PCA. See Formatter cover and formatter PCA on page 60.

●

Rear-door assembly. See Rear-door assembly on page 62.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 66.

●

Top-right cover. See Top-right cover on page 73.

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 74.

●

Front-right and right-side cover assembly. See Front-right and right-side cover assembly
on page 76.

●

Lower-right cover and bracket. See Lower-right cover and bracket on page 80.

●

Top cover. See Top cover on page 84.

●

Power switch assembly. See Power-switch assembly on page 96.
TIP: Removing the power-switch assembly makes it easier to disconnect the connectors at
the front of the ECU.

2.

Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).
Figure 2-98 Remove the ECU (1 of 9)

1

110 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

3.

Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the fan assembly.
NOTE: As you remove the fan assembly, release the USB wire harness from the retainers along
the bottom of the assembly (callout 2).
Figure 2-99 Removing the ECU (2 of 9)

1

2
4.

Disconnect 12 connectors (callout 1).
Figure 2-100 Remove the ECU (3 of 9)

1

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures 111

5.

Release one tab (callout 1) on the air duct, and then lift the air duct out of the product.
Figure 2-101 Remove the ECU (4 of 9)

1
2

6.

Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), one FFC (callout 2), and then release the wire harnesses
from the retainers.
Figure 2-102 Remove the ECU (5 of 9)

2

1

112 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

7.

Remove six screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-103 Remove the ECU (6 of 9)

1

8.

Slight lift the ECU up, and then rotate the top of the ECU pan away from the product.
CAUTION: The ECU is still attached to the product by a FFC. Do not try to completely remove
the ECU.
Figure 2-104 Remove the ECU (7 of 9)

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures 113

9.

Disconnect one FFC (callout 1).
Figure 2-105 Remove the ECU (8 of 9)

1

10. Remove the ECU.
NOTE: The ECU and the ECU pan together are a single field-replaceable unit (FRU). You do not
have to separate the ECU and the ECU pan.
Figure 2-106 Remove the ECU (9 of 9)

114 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Cassette pickup (Tray 2) solenoid or Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup solenoid
1.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:
●

DIMM cover. See DIMM cover and DIMM on page 57.

●

Formatter cover and formatter PCA. See Formatter cover and formatter PCA on page 60.

●

Rear-door assembly. See Rear-door assembly on page 62.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 66.

●

Top-right cover. See Top-right cover on page 73.

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 74.

●

Front-right and right-side cover assembly. See Front-right and right-side cover assembly
on page 76.

●

Lower-right cover. See Lower-right cover and bracket on page 80.

●

Top cover. See Top cover on page 84.

●

Power switch assembly. See Power-switch assembly on page 96.
TIP: Removing the power-switch assembly makes it easier to disconnect the connectors at
the front of the ECU.

●
2.

Engine control unit (ECU). See Engine control unit (ECU) on page 110.

Release the wire harness from the guides (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).
CAUTION: Do not try to remove the gear cover after the screws are removed (it is still attached
to the solenoid-wire harness).
Figure 2-107 Cassette pickup (Tray 2) or Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) solenoid (1 of 3)

1

ENWW

2

Removal and replacement procedures 115

3.

Carefully unwind the wire harness (callout 1) from the retainer on the gear cover (callout 2), and
then remove the cover.
Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the gear cover, make sure that you wrap the solenoid-wire
harness around the retainer on and on-half times in a clockwise direction.
Figure 2-108 Cassette pickup (Tray 2) or Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) solenoid (2 of 3)

1

2

4.

For the cassette (Tray 2) pickup solenoid: Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the
solenoid (callout 2).
For the Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup solenoid: Remove one screw (callout 3), and then
remove the solenoid (callout 4).
Figure 2-109 Cassette pickup (Tray 2) or Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) solenoid (3 of 3)

3

4

2

1

116 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Fuser motor
WARNING!
1.

ESD sensitive component.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:
●

DIMM cover. See DIMM cover and DIMM on page 57.

●

Formatter cover and formatter PCA. See Formatter cover and formatter PCA on page 60.

●

Rear-door assembly. See Rear-door assembly on page 62.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 66.

●

Top-right cover. See Top-right cover on page 73.

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 74.

●

Front-right and right-side cover assembly. See Front-right and right-side cover assembly
on page 76.

●

Lower-right cover. See Lower-right cover and bracket on page 80.

●

Top cover. See Top cover on page 84.

●

Power switch assembly. See Power-switch assembly on page 96.
TIP: Removing the power-switch assembly makes it easier to disconnect the connectors at
the front of the ECU.

●
2.

Engine controller unit (ECU). See Engine control unit (ECU) on page 110.

Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the fuser
motor.
Figure 2-110 Removing the fuser motor

2
1

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures 117

Sub fan and fan duct
1.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:
●

DIMM cover. See DIMM cover and DIMM on page 57.

●

Formatter cover and formatter PCA. See Formatter cover and formatter PCA on page 60.

●

Rear-door assembly. See Rear-door assembly on page 62.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 66.

●

Top-right cover. See Top-right cover on page 73.

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 74.

●

Front-right and right-side cover assembly. See Front-right and right-side cover assembly
on page 76.

●

Lower-right cover. See Lower-right cover and bracket on page 80.

●

Top cover. See Top cover on page 84.

●

Power switch assembly. See Power-switch assembly on page 96.
TIP: Removing the power-switch assembly makes it easier to disconnect the connectors at
the front of the ECU.

●
2.

Engine controller unit (ECU). See Engine control unit (ECU) on page 110.

Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 2-111 Removing the sub fan and fan duct (1 of 5)

1

118 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

3.

Release the wire harness from the retainers (callout 1), and then feed the wire harness through
the opening in the chassis (callout 2).
Figure 2-112 Removing the sub fan and fan duct (2 of 5)

2
1

4.

Release the wire harness from the retainers (callout 1).
Figure 2-113 Removing the sub fan and fan duct (3 of 5)

1

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures 119

5.

To remove the fan and duct: Remove two screws (callout 1), and then carefully remove the fan
and duct.
NOTE: If necessary, release the metal static clip, release two tabs and separate the fan from the
duct.
Figure 2-114 Remove the sub fan and fan duct (4 of 5)

1

6.

To remove the fan only: Release the metal static clip, release two tabs (callout 1), and then
remove the sub fan.
Reinstallation tip If you install a replacement sub fan, the air must flow into the product. Arrows
embossed on the fan frame indicate air flow direction.
Figure 2-115 Remove the sub fan and fan duct (5 of 5)

1

120 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

High-voltage power supply (HVPS)
1.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:
●

DIMM cover. See DIMM cover and DIMM on page 57.

●

Formatter cover and formatter PCA. See Formatter cover and formatter PCA on page 60.

●

Rear-door assembly. See Rear-door assembly on page 62.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 66.

●

Top-right cover. See Top-right cover on page 73.

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 74.

●

Front-right and right-side cover assembly. See Front-right and right-side cover assembly
on page 76.

●

Lower-right cover. See Lower-right cover and bracket on page 80.

●

Top cover. See Top cover on page 84.

●

Power switch assembly. See Power-switch assembly on page 96.
TIP: Removing the power-switch assembly makes it easier to disconnect the connectors at
the front of the ECU.

2.

●

Duplex models only: Duplex media-feed assembly. See Duplex media-feed assembly
on page 104.

●

Engine control unit (ECU). See Engine control unit (ECU) on page 110.

●

Sub fan and duct. See Sub fan and fan duct on page 118.

Remove one screw (callout 3).
NOTE: In this figure the gear cover is shown removed for clarity. Do not remove the gear cover.
The gears behind the cover are not captive and can easily be dislodged if the cover is removed.
Figure 2-116 Remove the high-voltage power supply (1 of 11)

1

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures 121

3.

Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the base plate (callout 2).
Figure 2-117 Remove the high-voltage power supply (2 of 11)

2

1

4.

Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the right-side guide (callout 2).
Figure 2-118 Remove the high-voltage power supply (3 of 11)

1

122 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

2

ENWW

5.

Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the left-side guide (callout 2).
Figure 2-119 Remove the high-voltage power supply (4 of 11)

2

1

6.

Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2) and then slide the guide toward the front
of the product to release it.
Remove the guide.
Figure 2-120 Remove the high-voltage power supply (5 of 11)

1
2

ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures 123

7.

Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).
Figure 2-121 Remove the high-voltage power supply (6 of 11)

2

1

8.

Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 2-122 Remove the high-voltage power supply (7 of 11)

1

124 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

9.

Place the product face-side up. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the positioning
guide (callout 2).
CAUTION: When you place the product face-side up, do not damage the rear-door link arm on
the left side of the product.
NOTE: The positioning guide might appear to still be fastened to the product. You might have to
use slight force to separate it form the product.
Figure 2-123 Remove the high-voltage power supply (8 of 11)

1

2

10. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the plate (callout 2).
Figure 2-124 Remove the high-voltage power supply (9 of 11)

1

ENWW

2

Removal and replacement procedures 125

11. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the high-voltage power supply (callout 2).
NOTE: Disconnect two connectors and one FFC (callout 3) on the HPVS as you separate the it
from the product.
Figure 2-125 Remove the high-voltage power supply (10 of 11)

3

1

2

12. After the high-voltage power supply is removed, make sure that the spring on the chassis is in
place.
CAUTION: This spring is not captive and can easily be lost.
Figure 2-126 Remove the high-voltage power supply (11 of 11)

126 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

3

ENWW

Solve problems

●

Solve problems checklist

●

Menu map

●

Troubleshooting process

●

Tools for troubleshooting

●

Clear jams

●

Solve paper-handling problems

●

Solve image-quality problems

●

Clean the product

●

Solve performance problems

●

Solve connectivity problems

●

Service mode functions

●

Product updates

127

Solve problems checklist
The following checklist contains basic questions that you can ask the customer to help define problems
quickly.
Table 3-1 Initial troubleshooting checklist
Environment

Media

Input trays

●

Is the product installed in a suitable environment? See Environmental specifications on page 309.

●

Is the product installed on a solid, level surface?

●

Is the supply voltage (from the wall receptacle) within the product's rated voltage (see Electrical
specifications on page 308)?

●

Is the power cord fully seated into both the product and the electrical receptacle in the wall?

●

Is the product exposed to direct sunlight?

●

Does the customer use only supported print media?

●

Is the media in good condition (no curl, folds, or other flaws)?

●

Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits?

●

Is the correct side of the page printed on first?

●

Is long-grain paper being used?

●

Is the correct amount of media loaded in the tray (not stacked above the arrows embossed in the
tray)?

●

Is the media placed in the tray correctly?

●

The sliding media guides in the tray might be too tight to too loose.

Correctly adjust the sliding media guides
1.

Remove the tray from the product.

2.

Remove the stack of paper.

3.

Slide the media guides until the guide indicators align with the size of paper that you are using.
NOTE:

The supported paper sizes for the tray are embossed in the tray.

4.

Replace the stack of paper.

5.

Install the tray in the product, and resend the print job.

●

Is the tray cassette installed correctly in the product?

Print cartridge

●

Is the print cartridge installed correctly?

Fuser

●

Is the fuser installed correctly?

Covers and doors

●

Is the cartridge door fully closed?

●

Is the rear door (face-up delivery) fully closed?

128 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Table 3-1 Initial troubleshooting checklist (continued)
Condensation

Miscellaneous

ENWW

●

Does condensation occur following a temperature change (particularly in winter following cold
storage)? If so, wipe off the affected parts or leave the product on for 10 to 20 minutes and then try
to resume printing.

●

Was a print cartridge opened soon after it was moved from a cold room to a warm one? If so, allow
the print cartridge and the product to acclimate to room temperature for one to two hours.

●

Are any non-HP components installed? Check for any non-HP components (print cartridge, memory
modules, and EIO cards) installed in the product and remove them. Hewlett-Packard recommends
the use of HP components in its products.

●

Network models only: Remove the product from the network, and make sure that the failure is with
the product before beginning troubleshooting.

Solve problems checklist 129

Menu map
The menu map can be an important troubleshooting tool. The menu map shows each control-panel
menu and submenu to aid navigation through the menu system. Print the menu map from the control
panel by completing the following steps.
.

1.

Press the Menu button

2.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
and then press the OK button.

3.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow button to navigate to the PRINT MENU MAP sub
menu, and then press the OK button to print the pages.

130 Chapter 3 Solve problems

button to navigate to the INFORMATION menu,

ENWW

Troubleshooting process
Determine the problem source
When the product malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the product control panel alerts
you to the situation. This chapter provides steps for correcting problems.
1

Is the product on and does a readable message appear?

Power on

Yes

No

Follow the power-on troubleshooting checks
following this table.
After the control-panel display is functional,
go to step 2.

2

Does Ready appear on the control-panel display?

Control-panel
messages

Yes

3

Open the INFORMATION menu and print the
configuration pages. Are all the accessories installed?

No

If an error message appears, see Interpret
control-panel messages on page 197.
After the errors have been corrected, go to
step 3.

Information pages
Yes

No

If accessories that are installed are not listed
on the configuration pages, remove the
accessory and reinstall it.
After evaluating the configuration pages, go
to step 4.

4

Does the print quality meet customer requirements?

Image quality

Yes

No

Compare images with the sample defects in
Solve image-quality problems on page 247.
When the print quality is acceptable, go to
step 5.

5

Can the customer print successfully from the host
computer?

Interface
Yes. This is the end of the
basic troubleshooting
process.

No

Verify that all I/O cables are connected
correctly and that a valid IP address is listed
on the Jetdirect configuration page.
If error messages appear on the controlpanel display, see Interpret control-panel
messages on page 197.
When the customer can print from the host
computer, this is the end of the basic
troubleshooting process.

ENWW

Troubleshooting process 131

Power subsystem
Power-on checks
Turn on the power. If the control-panel display remains blank or if it displays random patterns or
asterisks, perform the power-on checks to find the cause of the problem.
1.

Verify that the product is plugged into an active electrical outlet that delivers the correct voltage.

2.

Verify that the power switch is in the ON position.

3.

Make sure that the main fan on the right side runs for a short time.

4.

●

If the control-panel display is blank, but the main fan runs after the power is turned on, print
an engine test page to determine whether the problem is with the control-panel display, the
formatter, or other components. See Engine diagnostics on page 134.

●

The overcurrent/overvoltage protection circuit in the low-voltage power supply unit might be
running. Turn the printer off, unplug the power cord, and turn the printer on. If the printer does
not function, the fuse melts, or the power supply is malfunctioning, replace the engine
controller unit. See Engine control unit (ECU) on page 110.

●

Verify that the LEDs at the back of the product on the formatter, are functioning correctly. See
LED diagnostics on page 133.

Remove any HP Jetdirect or other EIO cards, and then turn off and turn on the product.

132 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting
Individual component diagnostics
LED diagnostics
LEDs on the formatter can help identify and troubleshoot product problems.
LED indicators
Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the product is functioning correctly.
Figure 3-1 Formatter LEDs

1
2
1

HP Jetdirect LEDs

2

Heartbeat LED

Formatter heartbeat LED
The heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly. While the product is initializing
after you turn it on, the LED blinks rapidly, and then turns off. When the product has finished the
initialization sequence, the heartbeat LED pulses on and off.
The heartbeat LED performs the following sequences:
1.

The LED blinks when the product power is on.

2.

If the light is not blinking, check the following:

3.

ENWW

◦

Reseat the formatter connectors.

◦

Replace the memory.

◦

Replace the formatter.

If the control panel display does not illuminate, perform an engine test to check the engine (see
Engine-test button on page 134). You must have paper loaded in Tray 2 for the engine test.

Tools for troubleshooting 133

HP Jetdirect LEDs
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and
the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED
is off, a link has failed.
For link failures, check the network cable connections.
For nonlink errors, print a configuration page. The second page is the HP Jetdirect configuration page.
Examine this page for any inconsistencies among the network settings.

Engine diagnostics
Printing test pages helps you determine whether or not the product engine and the formatter are
functioning.
NOTE: Information pages also can be used to solve product issues. For information about printing
information pages, see the product user guide.
Engine-test button
To verify that the product engine is functioning, print an engine-test page.
Print the engine test pages
NOTE: A damaged formatter might interfere with the engine test. If the engine test page does not print,
try removing the formatter and performing the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful,
the problem is in the formatter, the control panel, or the cable that connects them together.
1.

Remove the DIMM cover. See DIMM cover and DIMM on page 57.

2.

Press the engine test-page button (callout 1).
Figure 3-2 Locating the engine-test-page switch

1

The test page should have a series of horizontal lines. The test page prints from the last tray that the
product used to print, unless the product has been turned off and then turned on again since the most
recent print job. If the product has been turned off and then on again since the most recent print job,

134 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

then the page will print from Tray 2. The product continuously prints test pages as long as the test-page
switch is depressed. The product will not print a test page if it is in Sleep mode.
Print formatter test pages
If the engine test was successful with the formatter removed, reinstall the formatter and then print a
configuration page to test the functionality of the formatter.
.

1.

Press the Menu button

2.

Press the down arrow

3.

Press the OK button to select the menu.

4.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
CONFIGURATION option.

5.

Press the OK button to select the option and print the page.

button or the up arrow

button to navigate to the INFORMATION menu.

button to navigate to the PRINT

Fuser test page
This test helps to determine if the fuser needs to be replaced, or if it has exceeded its expected life.
A customer can complete the steps below and describe the results to the HP Customer Care
representative. If the page shows no problems, the fuser does not need replacing.
Replace the fuser (see Fuser on page 100) if the page shows the following problems:

ENWW

●

Fuser offset repeats in the boxes on the page

●

Lines or streaks on the page (usually down the edges of the page) indicate fuser contamination

1.

Press the Menu button

2.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
and then press the OK button.

button to navigate to the DIAGNOSTICS menu,

3.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
PAGE menu, and then press the OK button.

button to navigate to the PRINT FUSER TEST

.

Tools for troubleshooting 135

Paper-path test (and automatic sensors test)
Paper-path test
1.

Press the Menu button

2.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
and then press the OK button.

button to navigate to the DIAGNOSTICS menu,

3.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
sub menu, and then press the OK button.

button to navigate to the PAPER PATH TEST

4.

Select the paper path test options for the test you want to run

.

NOTE: Values that have an asterisk (*) are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no
default.
Item

Sub-item

Values

PAPER PATH TEST

Description
Tests the paper-handling features
of the product, such as the
configuration of the trays.

PRINT TEST PAGE

Generates a page for testing the
paper-handling features. You must
define the path for the test to test
specific paper paths.

SOURCE

ALL TRAYS
TRAY 1

Specifies whether the test page is
printed from all trays or from a
specific tray.

TRAY 2*
TRAY 3
TRAY 4
DUPLEX

OFF

Determines whether the duplexer
is used in the test.

ON
COPIES

1*
10

Determines how many pages to
send from the specified source as
part of the test.

50
100
500

Paper-path sensors test
1.

Press the Menu button

2.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
and then press the OK button.

3.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow button to navigate to the PAPER PATH
SENSORS sub menu, and then press the OK button.

136 Chapter 3 Solve problems

.
button to navigate to the DIAGNOSTICS menu,

ENWW

4.

Select the paper path test options for the test you want to run

5.

Press the OK button to begin the test, and then observe the control-panel designators (see the
table below). The sensors should display a 1 status as paper passes by the sensors.

Table 3-2 Paper-path sensors
Sensor name

Sensor
number

Replacement part
number

Description

Paper-path sensor test
name

TOP sensor

PS215

RM1-6511-000CN

Photointerrupter

A TOP sensor

Fuser delivery sensor

PS2

110 Volt:
RM1-6274-000CN

Photointerrupter

B Fuser output sensor

220 Volt:
RM1-6319-000CN

1

Duplex media-feed sensor

PS502

RM1-6280-000CN

Photointerrupter

C Duplex sensor

Media width sensor

PS225

RM1-6512-000CN

Photointerrupter

D Paper width sensor 1

Paper feeder media-feed
sensor - Tray 31

PS8008

CE530-69001

Photointerrupter

E Tray 3 feed sensor

Paper feeder media-feed
sensor - Tray 41

PS8008

CE530-69001

Photointerrupter

F Tray 4 feed sensor

Tray 3 and Tray 4 use a PS8008 sensor.

Sensor test (interactive)
Performs tests to determine whether the paper-path sensors are operating correctly.
Table 3-3 MANUAL SENSOR TEST (special mode test)
Sensor or switch
name

Sensor
number

Replacement part
number

Description

Paper-path sensor
test name

Testing of sensor

TOP sensor

PS215

RM1-6511-000CN

Photointerrupter

A TOP sensor

Open the cartridge
door, remove the
print cartridge, raise
the registration
shutter, and then use
a screwdriver to
activate the sensor.

Fuser delivery sensor

PS2

110 Volt:
RM1-6274-000CN

Photointerrupter

B Fuser output
sensor

Open the rear door,
and then use a
screwdriver to
activate the sensor.

220 Volt:
RM1-6319-000CN

ENWW

Duplex media-feed
sensor

PS502

RM1-6280-000CN
(power supply)

Photointerrupter

C Duplex sensor

Remove the Tray 2
cassette, push the
green button to drop
the duplex tray, and
then raise the tray.

Media width sensor

PS225

RM1-6512-000CN

PCA

D Paper width
sensor 1

Open the cartridge
door, remove the
print cartridge, and
then lift the
registration flap to
activate the sensor.

Tools for troubleshooting 137

Table 3-3 MANUAL SENSOR TEST (special mode test) (continued)
Sensor or switch
name

Sensor
number

Replacement part
number

Description

Paper-path sensor
test name

Testing of sensor

Paper feeder mediafeed sensor - Tray 31

PS8008

(Replace feeder
unit)

Photointerrupter

E Tray 3 feed sensor

Remove the Tray 2
cassette, use a small
screwdriver to
activate the sensor
through the small
slot toward the front
of the product.

Paper feeder mediafeed sensor - Tray 41

PS8008

(Replace feeder
unit)

Photointerrupter

F Tray 4 feed sensor

Remove the Tray 3
cassette, use a small
screwdriver to
activate the sensor
through the small
slot toward the front
of the product.

Face-down media
tray media-full sensor

PS4

Photo interruptor:
WG8-5696-000CN

Photointerrupter

G FD tray full sensor Lift the face-down
tray output levers to
activate the sensor.

Top-cover flag:
RM1-6289-000CN

1

Rear cover open
sensor

PS1

WG8-5696-000CN

Photointerrupter

H Face-up detect
sensor

Open the rear door
to about 15 degrees.

Cartridge-door
switch

SW501

WC4-5171-000CN

Switch

I Cartridge-door
open switch

Open the cartridge
door.

Face-up detect
sensor

PS8001

WG8-5696-000CN

Photointerrupter

J Rear cover open
sensor

Open the rear door
to about 90 degrees.

MP tray mediapresence sensor

PS205

RM1-6510-000CN

Photointerrupter

K Tray 1 paper
sensor

Push the sensor
lever to the right of
the center of the tray,
and hold it there for 3
seconds.

Cassette mediapresence sensor

PS3

Currently not
replaceable

Photointerrupter

L Tray 2 paper
sensor

Remove the Tray 2
cassette, and then
push the sensor
lever.

Tray 2 cassette
presence switch

SW235

RM1-6487-000CN
(tray sensor PCA)

Switch

M Tray 2 detect
sensor

Remove the Tray 2
cassette, and then
reinstall it.

Tray 3 and Tray 4 use a PS8008 sensor.

Table 3-4 MANUAL SENSOR TEST 2 (special mode test)
Sensor or switch
name

Sensor
number

Replacement part
number

Description

Paper-path sensor
test name

Testing of sensor

Paper feeder Tray 3
cassette mediapresence sensor1

PS451

CE530-69001

Photointerrupter

N Tray 3 paper
sensor

Remove the Tray 3
cassette, and then
push the sensor
lever.

Paper feeder Tray 3
cassette presence
sensor1

PS461

CE530-69001

Photointerrupter

O Tray 3 detect
sensor

Remove the Tray 3
cassette, and then
reinstall it.

138 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Table 3-4 MANUAL SENSOR TEST 2 (special mode test) (continued)
Sensor or switch
name

Sensor
number

Replacement part
number

Description

Paper-path sensor
test name

Testing of sensor

Paper feeder Tray 4
cassette mediapresence sensor1

PS451

CE530-69001

Photointerrupter

P Tray 4 paper
sensor

Remove the Tray 4
cassette, and then
push the sensor
lever.

Paper feeder Tray 4
cassette presence
sensor1

PS461

CE530-69001

Photointerrupter

Q Tray 3 detect
sensor

Remove the Tray 4
cassette, and then
reinstall it.

1

Tray 3 and Tray 4 use PS451 and PS461 sensors.

Access the MANUAL SENSOR TEST or the MANUAL SENSOR TEST 2 in the DIAGNOSTICS menu.
1.

Press the Menu button

2.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
and then press the OK button.

3.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow button to navigate to the MANUAL SENSOR
TEST or MANUAL SENSOR TEST 2 menu, and then press the OK button.

4.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
OK button to select the test.

5.

To exit the diagnostic test, press the stop button

.
button to navigate to the DIAGNOSTICS menu,

button to highlight a test, and then press the
, and then select EXIT DIAGNOSTICS.

NOTE: Menus are not available during a test. During a test, the OK button functions like the stop
button .

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting 139

A TOP (Top-of-Page) sensor
Test the TOP sensor (PS215)
1.

Open the cartridge door, and then remove the print cartridge.

2.

Raise the registration shutter.

3.

Use a small screwdriver to activate the TOP sensor.
Figure 3-3 Test the TOP sensor

4.

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

5.

If there is no response, replace the TOP sensor.

140 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

B Fuser output sensor
Test the fuser delivery sensor (PS2)
1.

Open the rear door.

2.

Slowly insert a piece of paper to activate the fuser delivery sensor.
Figure 3-4 Test the fuser delivery sensor

ENWW

3.

Check the control-panel display for a sensor response.

4.

If there is no response, replace the fuser.

Tools for troubleshooting 141

C Duplex sensor
Test the duplex media-feed sensor (PS502)
1.

Remove the Tray 2 cassette.

2.

Press the green lever to release the duplex media-feed assembly (metal tray).

3.

Raise the duplex media-feed assembly until it snaps into place.
Figure 3-5 Test the duplex media-feed sensor

4.

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

5.

If there is no response, replace the high-voltage power supply (duplex model).

142 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

D Paper width sensor 1
Test the media width sensor (PS225)
1.

Open the cartridge door, and then remove the print cartridge.

2.

Raise and then lower the registration flap to activate the sensor.
Figure 3-6 Test the media width sensor

ENWW

3.

Check the control-panel display for a sensor response.

4.

If there is no response, replace the media width sensor PCA.

Tools for troubleshooting 143

E Tray 3 feed sensor
Test the Tray 3 media-feed sensor (PS8008)
1.

Remove the Tray 3 cassette.

2.

Use a small screwdriver to activate the sensor.
Figure 3-7 Test the Tray 3 media-feed sensor

3.

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

4.

If there is no response, replace the optional Tray 3 assembly.

144 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

F Tray 4 feed sensor
Test the Tray 4 media-feed sensor (PS8008)
1.

Remove the Tray 4 cassette.

2.

Use a small screwdriver to activate the sensor.
Figure 3-8 Test the Tray 4 media-feed sensor

ENWW

3.

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

4.

If there is no response, replace the optional Tray 4 assembly.

Tools for troubleshooting 145

G FD tray full sensor
Test the face-down media tray media-full (PS1)
1.

Raise and then lower the output-bin levers to activate the sensor.
Figure 3-9 Test the face-down media tray media-full sensor

2.

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

3.

If there is no response, replace the top-cover flag or the photo interrupter.

146 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

H Face up detect sensor
Test the rear cover open sensor (PS1)
1.

Open the rear door until it stops to activate the sensor.
Figure 3-10 Test the rear cover open sensor

ENWW

2.

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

3.

If there is no response, replace the rear cover open sensor.

Tools for troubleshooting 147

I Cartridge-door open switch
Test the cartridge-door open switch (SW501)
1.

Open the cartridge door to activate the sensor.
Figure 3-11 Test the cartridge-door open switch

2.

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

3.

If there is no response, make sure that the sensor-actuator tab on the door is not damaged or
missing.
If necessary, replace the cartridge-door switch.

148 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

J Rear cover open sensor
Test the face-up detect sensor (PS8001)
1.

Open the rear door, and then gently pull down on the door and lower the door until it is fully open
to activate the sensor.
NOTE: Figure 3-13 Test the face-up detect sensor (2 of 2) on page 149 shows the location of
the face-up detect sensor (PS8001) behind the left cover.
Figure 3-12 Test the face-up detect sensor (1 of 2)

Figure 3-13 Test the face-up detect sensor (2 of 2)

2.

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

3.

If there is no response, make sure that the sensor-actuator tab on the door is not damaged or
missing.
If necessary, replace the face-up detect sensor.

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting 149

K Tray 1 paper sensor
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) media-presence sensor (PS205)
1.

Push the sensor lever toward the right side of the product and hold it there for 3 seconds to activate
the sensor.
Figure 3-14 Test the Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) media-presence sensor

2.

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

3.

If there is no response, replace the multipurpose sensor PCA.

150 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

L Tray 2 paper sensor
Tray 2 cassette media-presence sensor (PS3)
1.

Remove the Tray 2 cassette, and then push on the sensor levers to activate the sensor.
Figure 3-15 Test the Tray 2 cassette media-presence sensor

ENWW

2.

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

3.

If there is no response, replace the unit.

Tools for troubleshooting 151

M Tray 2 detect switch
Tray 2 cassette presence switch (SW235)
1.

Remove the Tray 2 cassette, and then install it to activate the sensor.
Figure 3-16 Test the Tray 2 cassette presence switch

2.

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

3.

If there is no response, make sure that the sensor-actuator tab on the cassette is not damaged or
missing.
If necessary, replace the switch.

152 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

N Tray 3 paper sensor
Tray 3 media-presence sensor (PS451)
1.

Remove the Tray 3 cassette, and then push on the sensor levers to activate the sensor.
Figure 3-17 Test the Tray 3 cassette media-presence sensor

ENWW

2.

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

3.

If there is no response, replace the optional 500-sheet feeder.

Tools for troubleshooting 153

O Tray 3 detect switch
Tray 3 cassette presence switch (SW461)
1.

Remove the Tray 3 cassette, and then install it to activate the sensor.
Figure 3-18 Test the Tray 3 cassette presence switch

2.

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

3.

If there is no response, make sure that the sensor-actuator tab on the cassette is not damaged or
missing.
If necessary, replace the optional 500-sheet feeder.

154 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

P Tray 4 paper sensor
Tray 4 media-presence sensor (PS451)
1.

Remove the Tray 4 cassette, and then push on the sensor levers to activate the sensor.
Figure 3-19 Test the Tray 4 cassette media-presence sensor

ENWW

2.

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

3.

If there is no response, replace the optional 500-sheet feeder.

Tools for troubleshooting 155

Q Tray 4 detect switch
Tray 4 cassette presence switch (SW461)
1.

Remove the Tray 4 cassette, and then install it to activate the sensor.
Figure 3-20 Test the Tray 4 cassette presence switch

2.

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

3.

If there is no response, make sure that the sensor-actuator tab on the cassette is not damaged or
missing.
If necessary, replace the optional 500-sheet feeder.

156 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Print/stop test
Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image formation defects and jams
within the engine. The test can be programmed to stop from 0 to 60,000 ms.
Perform the print/stop test in the DIAGNOSTICS menu
1.

Press the Menu button

2.

Press the down arrow

3.

Press the OK button to select the menu.

4.

Press the down arrow
sub menu.

5.

Press the OK button to select the sub menu.

6.

Press the down arrow

.
button or the up arrow

button or the up arrow

button or the up arrow

button to navigate to the DIAGNOSTICS menu.

button to navigate to the PRINT/STOP TEST

button to set a stop time.

NOTE: Range is 0 - 60,000 milliseconds. The default is 0.
Table 3-5 Print/stop settings

ENWW

Duration

Description

0 msecs

The leading edge of the paper stops about 10 mm (0.36 in) beyond the silver paper guide of the
registration assembly.

100 msecs

The leading edge of the paper stops about 24 mm (0.94 in) beyond the silver paper guide of the
registration assembly.

500 msecs

The leading edge of the paper stops prior to the paper entering the “nip” of the fuser assembly; the
nip is the gap between the pressure roller and the hot fusing roller.

1000 msecs

The leading edge of the paper stops about 55 mm (2.17 in) beyond the fuser assembly output rollers.

1200 msecs

Simplex print operation: The leading edge of the paper stops 100 mm (3.94 in) past the face-down
delivery stacker rollers.

1,500 msecs

Simplex print operation: The leading edge of the paper stops 5 mm (0.20 in) beyond the output-binfull sensor flags.

2,500 msecs

Duplex print operation: The leading edge of the paper has passed through the fuser assembly and
into the output stacker rollers. The paper has now reversed direction and stopped 90 mm (3.55 in)
before the leading edge reaches the output-bin-full sensor flags.

3,000 msecs

Duplex print operation: The leading edge of the paper has passed through the fuser assembly and
into the output stacker rollers. The paper has now reversed direction and entered the duplex
accessory. The leading edge of the paper stops about 15 mm (0.59 in) after encountering the duplex
media-feed sensor (PS502).

7.

Press the OK button to start the test.

8.

Send a print job to the product. The product will stop printing at the selected time.

Tools for troubleshooting 157

Component tests
Half self-test
Perform a half self-test to determine which image-formation process might be malfunctioning.
NOTE: It might be easier to perform the print/stop test to stop the product during the printing process.
See Print/stop test on page 157.
1.

Print a configuration page from the control panel.

2.

Open the cartridge door after the paper advances half-way through the product, which is about 3
to 5 seconds after the main motor begins to rotate. The leading edge of the paper should have
advanced past the print cartridge.

3.

Remove the print cartridge.

4.

Open the print cartridge drum shield to view the drum surface.
If a dark and distinct toner image is present on the drum surface, assume that the cleaning,
conditioning, writing, and developing functions of the electrophotographic process are functioning
correctly. Troubleshoot the failure as a transfer or fusing problem. If no image is present on the
drum, perform the drum rotation test check. See Drum rotation test check on page 158.

Drum rotation test check
NOTE: This test is especially important if refilled print cartridges are in use.
The photosensitive drum, which is located in the print cartridge, must rotate in order for the print process
to work. The photosensitive drum receives its drive from the main gear assembly. Use this procedure
to determine whether the drum is rotating.
1.

Open the cartridge door.

2.

Remove the print cartridge.

3.

Mark the cartridge drive gear with a felt-tipped marker. Note the position of the mark.

4.

Install the print cartridge, and then close the cartridge door. The start-up sequence should rotate
the drum enough to move the mark on the gear.

5.

Open the product and inspect the mark on the cartridge drive gear.
Verify that the mark moved. If there was no movement, inspect the main gear assembly to make
sure that it connects with the print-cartridge gears. If the drive gears function but the drum does
not move, replace the print cartridge.

Diagnostics menu components test
Use this diagnostic test to isolate and test individual product components.
.

1.

Press the Menu button

2.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
and then press the OK button.

button to navigate to the DIAGNOSTICS menu,

3.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
sub menu, and then press the OK button.

button to navigate to the COMPONENT TEST

158 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

4.

Press the down arrow

button or the up arrow

button to select a component to test.

Table 3-6 Components test

1

5.

ENWW

Component test

Item

Control-panel display
message

Description

Main motor test

M8001

DRUM MOTOR

Activates the main motor for 10 seconds.

Scanner motor test

Not
applicabl
e

LASER SCANNER MOTOR

Activates the laser/scanner motor for 10
seconds.

Fuser motor test

M8002

FUSER MOTOR

Activates the fuser motor for 10 seconds.

Clutch drive test

CL1

INT FEED ROLLER CLUTCH

Activates the main motor to activate the
paper feeder pickup clutch for 10 seconds.

Ttay 1 (multipurpose tray)
pickup solenoid test

SL1

MP TRAY SOLENOID DRIVE

Activates the Tray 1 pickup solenoid for 10
seconds.

Tray 2 pickup solenoid test

SL2

TRAY 2 PICKUP SOLENOID

Activates the Tray 3 cassette pickup
solenoid for 10 seconds.

Tray 3 pickup solenoid test

SL31

TRAY 3 PICKUP SOLENOID

Activates the Tray 4 cassette pickup
solenoid for 10 seconds.

Tray 4 pickup solenoid test

SL31

TRAY 4 PICKUP SOLENOID

Activates the Tray 2 cassette pickup
solenoid for 10 seconds.

Tray 3 and Tray 4 both use a SL3.

Press the OK button to start the test.

Tools for troubleshooting 159

Diagrams
Block diagrams
Figure 3-21 Product cross section
2

1

17

16

3

15

4

14

6

5

13

12

7

11

10

9

8

Item

Description

Item

Description

1

Face-down delivery roller

10

Cassette (Tray 2) separation pad

2

Fuser film

11

Cassette (Tray 2) pickup roller

3

Laser/scanner

12

Duplex repickup roller (duplex models)

4

Photosensitive drum

13

Registration roller

5

Print cartridge

14

Transfer roller

6

Registration shutter

15

Duplex-feed roller (duplex models)

7

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup roller

16

Pressure roller

8

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) separation pad

17

Fuser delivery roller

9

Feed roller

160 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Figure 3-22 Optional paper feeder (Tray 3 and Tray 4) cross section
1

2

3

ENWW

Item

Description

1

Pickup roller

2

Feed roller

3

Separation pad

Tools for troubleshooting 161

Plug/jack locations
Figure 3-23 Plug/jack locations

1

2

3

4

Item

Description

1

RJ.45 network connection (network models only)

2

EIO slot (covered)

3

Hi-Speed Host USB 2.0 connection

4

Power connection

162 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Location of connectors
ECU controller connections
Figure 3-24 ECU controller connections

ENWW

Item

Description

Item

Description

Item

Description

J1002

Fuser

J1601

SL2 Casette
(Tray 2) pickup
solenoid

J1701

Formatter

J1302

SW240 Power
switch

J1602

SL1 Tray 1 pickup
solenoid

J1702

Laser drive PCA

J1303

+3.3 A Formatter

J1603

PS 3 Cassette
media-presence
sensor

J1703

Memory tag

J1304

+3.3 A Formatter

J1604

PS205 Tray 1
media-presence
sensor

J1801

Paper feeder

J1305

GND Formatter

J1605

PS1 Face-up
sensor and PS4
Face-down sensor

J1802

RLTEST;
RLDRV2;
SJIG_CLK;
SJIG_RXD;
SJIG_TXD; GND;
NC; +24 v

J1306

GND Formatter

J1606

FM1 Main fan

J1803

TH3
Environmental
sensor

J1501

+3.3 V; OTRX0;
OTTX0; MD0;
MD2; GND

J1608

PS2, TH1, TH2
Fuser

J4209

Formatter

Tools for troubleshooting 163

Item

Description

Item

Description

Item

Description

J1503

Main motor

J1610

High-voltage
power supply
circuit; includes
PS225 Media
width senor and
PS215 TOP
sensor

FT1

SW501 Cartridgedoor switch (printcartridge door)

J1504

Fuser motor

J1612

SW235 Cassette
(Tray 2) presence
switch

FT2

SW501 Cartridgedoor switch (printcartridge door)

J1505

FM2 Sub fan,
PS8001 Rear door
sensor, and M3
Scanner motor

J1613

+24 V to FT1

1506

SW250 Test-print
switch

J1614

+24 V to FT2

164 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Locations of major components
Figure 3-25 External component locations
1

14

ENWW

13

12

2

3

11

10

4

5

8

9

6

7

Item

Description

Item

Description

1

Top cover

8

Right-rear cover

2

Control panel

9

DIMM cover

3

Top-right cover

10

Lower-right cover

4

Formatter cover

11

Right cover

5

Cartridge-door assembly

12

Front-right and right-side cover assembly

6

Left cover

13

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)

7

Rear-door assembly

14

Cassette (Tray 2)

Tools for troubleshooting 165

Figure 3-26 Major component locations
1

2

5
Item

Description

1

Fuser

2

Laser/scanner

3

Registration assembly

4

Pickup assembly

5

Duplex media-feed assembly (duplex models only)

166 Chapter 3 Solve problems

3

4

ENWW

Figure 3-27 Motors, fans, solenoids, and rollers component locations

ENWW

Item

Description

Item

Description

1

Fuser motor

6

Main fan

2

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup roller

7

Cassette (Tray 2) separartion pad

3

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup solenoid

8

Cassette (Tray 2) pickup solenoid

4

Transfer roller

9

Cassette (Tray 2) pickup roller

5

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) separation pad

10

Sub fan

Tools for troubleshooting 167

Figure 3-28 PCA component locations

Item

Description

1

Engine controller unit (ECU)

2

High-voltage power supply

168 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

ENWW

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16 Sub fan (FM2)

15 Main fan (FM1)

14 Fixing bias

13 Transfer bias

12 Developing bias

11 Primary charging bias

10 Fixing heater

9 Fixing motor (M8002)

8 Main motor (M8001)

7 Scanner motor (M3)

6 VIDEO signal

5 BD signal

4 Fixing delivery sensor (PS2)

3 TOP sensor (PS215)

2 Cassette pickup solenoid (SL2)

1 Print start command (EEC12)

Power ON

Two consecutive prints on Letter paper

WAIT

STBY

INTR

PRINT
LSTR

STBY

General timing charts
Figure 3-29 General timing chart

Tools for troubleshooting 169

General circuit diagram
Figure 3-30 General circuit diagram (1 of 2)
6

5

Fuser

MPT media
presence
sensor

Fuser delivery
sensor

2

3

2

M8002

M8001

J19

2

3

4

5

6

J18H

3

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

+24R

/ MM_ D E C

/ MM_ A C C

GN D

GN D

J8002

+24R

J18

MM_ F G

J22

J8003

GN D

2

M

M

GN D

SL

Main motor

F M_ R E V

SL

3

1

Fuser motor

1
1

J24

1

/ F M_ A C C

SL1

2

1

2

SL2

3

+24U

3

4

/ F M_ D E C

J24H

5

F M_ F G

S OL D 5

S OL D 3

TB1

TP

S OL D 2

2

1

S OL D 1

1

J2

2

6

TP1

S OL D 4

J200

J1703

1

J15

1

CST
MPT
pickup pickup
solenoid solenoid

1

Memory
tag

PS3
2

PS2

H1

CST media
presence
sensor

1

1

TH1 TH2
2

2

PS205

J6

4

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

F S RT H1

+3. 3U

+24U

F S RT H2

GN D

+3. 3V

GN D

+3. 3V

J1504

5

6

S J I G_ T X D

GN D

7

8

1

2

Power
switch

2

LED240

PF media
presence sensor

H2

GND

1
1

/OPFTRA
YS1

SOLD22

2

SOLD21

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

12

13

11

14

17

15

16

18

19

20

21

PF cassette
presence switch

2
6

5

4

3

TB2B

2

1

J471

Front USB
PCB

H

N

21
J1701B

Engine Controller PCA

170 Chapter 3 Solve problems

2

1

J470

Paper feeder (Option)

J1002B
1

2

3

4

5

6

ENWW

J 407
J 406

2

J 461

21
/ 3 . 3 V OF F

1

20
+5V

17

18

19
+5V

+5V

+5V

16
GN D

15
GN D

12

13

11

14
GN D

S DA

S CL

/ CCRT

10
V I F CL K

9
V I F DT

7

8
/ B DO

5

TP

GN D

6

5

4

1

/ V D O1

3

TB1B

TP1B

V D O1

4

3

2

2

SW461

1
1
2

SL1

J9998

J15B

GN D

+24U

PF pickup
solenoid

1

21

1

PSNS1

SL

2

V D O2

GND

SOLD20

Formatter
J4208

/ V D O2

+3.3V

SOLD19

SL3

Formatter

SOLD18

2

1

3

2

220V

GN D

J1503

+24V

4

N. C.

3

S J I G_ R X D

1

GN D

+3. 3A
2

2

RL DRV 2

3

RL T E S T

GN D

+5V

8

SW240

Cassette
presence switch

PS4

Face-down tray
media full sensor

1

J 405

1

2

J240

SW235

CRG door
switch

1

3

1

2

4

PS451

3

5

J1802

2

+24U

1

S J I G_ C L K

J1310

J1311

J1400

J1302

1

J4

6

Engine Controller PCA

J230

2

7

2

3

8

J1608

J 451

SW501

9

1

J1002

3

Face-up PS1
sensor

F S R OU T S N S

2

GN D

N

H

+24U
1

+5V

2

GN D

1

GN D

FT2

J1612

/ T RA Y S NS

FT1

J1403

J1614

J1613
1

+24R

+3. 3V

2

6

+24U

GN D

/ F US NS

3

J3

5

GN D

4

F UL L S NS

3

2

J1602

S OL D 7

2

1

S OL D 6

1

+3. 3V

J1605

2

J1601

MP S L

1

J1402

2

J1604

J1401

3

GN D

1

+24U

+3. 3V

2

J1703

CS T S L

GN D

1

/ MP P S N S

2

J1603

T A GOU T

+3. 3V

3

T A GI N

CS T P S NS

GN D

TB2

OP F _ C L

+24V

GN D

GN D
P WS N S

+3. 3V
GN D
/ T OP S N S

3

2

1

11
12

10

DEV
TR

TB508
TB509
TB510

FILMB
PA1
PA2

P RI

+3. 3V

S OL D 1 3

+3. 3V

OP F _ P F E D S 2

OP F _ P S N S 2

OP F _ C L

+24U

GN D

+3. 3V

E N V T E MP
GN D

GN D ( + 3 . 3 V )
+3. 3V
+3. 3V

21
22
23

+24R
+24R
+24R

27
28
29

2 6 GN D ( + 2 4 R )

GN D ( + 2 4 R )

GN D ( + 3 . 3 V )
20

GN D ( + 2 4 R )

T ON S 1
19

24

P WS N S
18

25

T ON S 2

DE V A CCL K
14

17

D E V D C P WM
13

/ D E V A C P WM

P RI A CCL K
12

/ T OP S N S

/ P R I A C P WM
11

16

P R I D C P WM
10

15

F S RCL K

/ F S R P WM
7

/ P RI DCCL K

T RF CL K
6

9

T R F P WM
5

8

/ DUP S NS
/ T RF NCL K
4

/ DUP S T A T E

3

T RF CS

1

GN D

( V)

2

/ TESTP

GN D

( V)

F A N1 L CK

F A N 1 ON

A C- N

A C- H

GN D

/ S C MA C C
+24U

+3. 3V
I OT R X D
I OT T X D
MD 0
MD 2
GN D

/ B DI

L P WM

+5V

GN D

/ V D O2

V D O2

GN D

V D O1

/ V D O1

GN D

CNT 2

CNT 1

CNT 0

+3. 3V

/ S C MD E C

/ R D OOR S N S
GN D

F A N2 L CK
F A N 2 ON

7
8

GN D
/ B DO

16
17
18
19

+5V
+5V
+5V

+3. 3A

15
GN D

GN D

14
GN D

7

6

J 8006

8

GN D

13

12
S DA
GN D

S CL

9

6
/ V D O1

11

5

/ CCRT

4

10

3

V D O1

V I F CL K

2
V D O2
GN D

V I F DT

1
GN D
/ V D O2

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

+3. 3A

19

4

PS215

TOP sensor

J8009DA

Tools for troubleshooting 171

1

9

GN D

J9999
3

2

B

TB506

3

PS502
TB505

4

/ OP F _ T R A Y S 2

OP F _ P F E D S 1

J1701

5

8
3

2

J1303

/ OP F _ T R A Y S 1

1

J1304

/ OP F _ P S N S 1

J1501

6

7

8

OP F _ S L 2

PS8001

J1305

OP F _ S L 1

19

J 1306

9

10

7

4

5

3

2

1

Laser scanner unit

1

11

6

2

2

3

12

2

13

J507

3

29

4

14

J501

5

Only for
Duplex model

6

1

S OL D 1 2

3

S OL D 1 4

Media width
sensor

15

PS225

16

SW250

7

2

S OL D 1 6

J402
1

S OL D 1 7

S OL D 1 5

J220

17

Duplex media
feed sensor

8

J513

18

Test print
switch

19

2

9

J1702

10

1

20

J8007L
11

Main fan
21

J250

12

J280

13

1 2 3
2

22

PF feed
clutch

1

14

+24U
2

23

PF media
feed sensor

3

FP0

24

J8007LA
4

FP1

15

TH3
1

6

25

5

J9999H

26

Environment
sensor
3
5

Vcc2(+5V)

16

INL1001
2

6

GND

17

CL1

CL1

1

1

2

3

J8009D
1

5

27

+3.3V

PS8008

2

8

PFEDS1

CL

7
1

6
2

5

GND

1

4

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

12
1

2

Paper feeder
connector PCA
J 403

3
2
2

J1606

4

28

J401
3

J 404

2
3

13

3

FPCK

18

J1505

2

29

J8007DA
1

1

19

4

13

S OL D 1 1

J8007D

4

S OL D 1 0

5
12
1

J1803
2

J1801
3

TB1001

4

6
1
5

7
2

S OL D 9

12
1

8
2

12
S OL D 8

4

9
3

1
9 10 11
3
6

8
4
7

7
5
8

6

/ OP F _ T R A Y S 2

J8001

9

5
6
10

4
7
11

3

/ OP F _ P S N S 2

8
12

2

OP F _ P F E D S 2

9

3

Vcc1(+3.3V)

1

10
2

J12

Operation
panel
2

J8010DH
J8010D
2

J100
3

1

1

Laser driver PCA
4

3

M

/FPCS

5

J8010L

5

J8008

4

M3

GND

6

1

2

Scanner
motor
7

3 2 1

Rear
door
sensor

13

1

OP F _ S L 2

FM2

6

10
2

7

3

3

8

1

9

2

Sub fan
J 8011

3

8

12 11
10

ENWW
11

12

1

Figure 3-31 General circuit diagram (2 of 2)
1

Formatter

J4205
J4209

D

TB1002

J1506
J1610

29

C

FM1

High-voltage
power supply circuit
TB507

FSRB

J502

FT3

J210

A

Internal print quality test pages
Cleaning page
Create and use the cleaning page
1.

Press the Menu button

2.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
DEVICE menu, and then press the OK button.

3.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
and then press the OK button.

4.

If the product does not have automatic two-sided printing, press the down arrow button or the
up arrow button to navigate to the CREATE CLEANING PAGE option, and then press the OK
button. If the product has automatic two-sided printing, go to step 5.

5.

Press the up arrow or down arrow / buttons to highlight the PROCESS CLEANING PAGE
option, and then press the OK button. The cleaning process takes several minutes.

6.

Discard the printed page. The task is complete.

.
button to navigate to the CONFIGURE
button to navigate to the PRINT QUALITY menu,

Configuration page
Print the configuration page
1.

Press the Menu button

2.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
and then press the OK button.

3.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow button to highlight the PRINT
CONFIGURATION option, and then press the OK button to print the page.

172 Chapter 3 Solve problems

.
button to navigate to the INFORMATION menu,

ENWW

Print quality troubleshooting tools
Repetitive image-defect ruler
Use a ruler to measure occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve image quality problems.
Place the ruler next to the first occurrence of the defect on the page. Find the distance between identical
defects and use the figure below to identify the component that is causing the defect.
NOTE: When printing this defect ruler, verify that any scaling options in the printer driver are disabled.
0 mm

38 mm
43.6 mm
50 mm

76 mm
79 mm

95 mm

ENWW

Distance between defects

Product components that cause the defect

38 mm

Print cartridge (primary charging roller)

43.6 mm

Print engine (transfer roller)

50 mm

Print cartridge (developer roller)

76 mm

Fuser (fuser film)

79 mm

Fuser (pressure roller)

95 mm

Print cartridge (OPC)

Tools for troubleshooting 173

Control-panel menus
You can perform most routine printing tasks from the computer through the printer driver or software
program. This is the most convenient way to control the product, and it overrides the product controlpanel settings. See the help files for the software program, or for more information about opening the
printer driver, see the product user guide.
You can also control the product by changing settings in the product’s control panel. Use the control
panel to access features not supported by the printer driver or software program, and to configure trays
for paper size and type.

Use the menus
1.

Press the Menu button

.

2.

Press the down arrow

3.

Press the OK button to select the option.

4.

Press the back arrow

5.

Press the Menu button

6.

Press the help button to see more information about an item.

button or the up arrow

button to navigate the listings.

button to return to the previous level.
to exit the menu.

The following are the main menus.
Main menus

SHOW ME HOW
RETRIEVE JOB
INFORMATION
PAPER HANDLING
MANAGE SUPPLIES
CONFIGURE DEVICE
DIAGNOSTICS
SERVICE

Show Me How menu
Use the SHOW ME HOW menu to print instructions for using the product.
To display: Press the Menu button

, and then select the SHOW ME HOW menu.

Item

Explanation

CLEAR JAMS

Provides instructions for clearing jams on the product.

LOAD TRAYS

Provides instructions for loading and configuring trays.

LOAD SPECIAL MEDIA

Provides instructions for loading special print media such as envelopes,
transparencies, and labels.

PRINT BOTH SIDES

Provides instructions for printing on both sides of the paper (duplex printing).

174 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Item

Explanation

SUPPORTED PAPER

Provides a list of the supported paper and print media.

PRINT HELP GUIDE

Prints a page that shows links to additional help on the Web.

PRODUCT VIEWS

Prints a page that explains the product components.

Retrieve job menu
Use the RETRIEVE JOB menu to view listings of all stored jobs.
To display: Press the Menu button
Item

Sub-item

, and then select the RETRIEVE JOB menu.

Options



Description
Each user who has stored jobs is listed
by name. Select the appropriate user
name to see a list of stored jobs.

ALL JOBS (WITH PIN)

PRINT

This message appears if a user has two
or more stored jobs that require a PIN.

PRINT AND DELETE
DELETE

Either the PRINT option or the PRINT
AND DELETE option displays,
depending on the type of jobs listed.
Use the COPIES option to specify the
number of copies of the job to print.

ALL JOBS (NO PIN)

PRINT
PRINT AND DELETE
DELETE

This message appears if a user has two
or more stored jobs that do not require a
PIN.
Either the PRINT option or the PRINT
AND DELETE option displays,
depending on the type of jobs listed.
Use the COPIES option to specify the
number of copies of the job to print.



PRINT

Each job is listed by name.

PRINT AND DELETE

Either the PRINT option or the PRINT
AND DELETE option displays,
depending on the type of jobs listed.

DELETE

Use the COPIES option to specify the
number of copies of the job to print.

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting 175

Item

Sub-item

Options

Description

COPIES

Specifies the number of copies of the job
to print. The default is 1.
For the ALL JOBS (NO PIN) and ALL
JOBS (WITH PIN) menus, two more
options are available:

USB STORAGE



COPIES



●

If you select the JOB option, the
number of copies specified in the
driver are printed.

●

If you select the CUSTOM VALUE
menu, another setting displays
where you can specify the number
of copies of the job to be printed.
The number of copies that were
specified in the driver are multiplied
by the number of copies specified
on the control panel. For example, if
you specified two copies in the
driver and specify two copies on the
control panel, a total of four copies
of the job are printed.

This menu displays if you have
connected a USB storage accessory to
the front of the product. Select the folder
and the name of the file, and then select
the number of copies to print.

Information menu
Use the INFORMATION menu to access and print specific product information.
To display: Press the Menu button

, and then select the INFORMATION menu.

Item

Description

PRINT MENU MAP

Prints the control-panel menu map, which shows the layout and current
settings of the control-panel menu items.

PRINT CONFIGURATION

Prints the product configuration pages, which show the printer settings and
installed accessories.

PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE

Prints the approximate remaining life for the supplies; reports statistics on
total number of pages and jobs processed, serial number, page counts, and
maintenance information.
HP provides approximations of the remaining life for the supplies as a
customer convenience. The actual remaining supply levels might be different
than the approximations provided.

PRINT USAGE PAGE

Prints a count of all paper sizes that have passed through the product, lists
whether they were one-sided or two-sided, and reports the page count.

PRINT DEMO PAGE

Prints a demonstration page.

PRINT FILE DIRECTORY

Prints the name and directory of files stored in the product.

176 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Item

Description

PRINT PCL FONT LIST

Prints the available PCL fonts.

PRINT PS FONT LIST

Prints the available PS fonts.

Paper handling menu
Use this menu to configure input trays by size and type. It is important to correctly configure the trays
with this menu before you print for the first time.
To display: Press the Menu button

, and then select the PAPER HANDLING menu.

NOTE: If you have used other HP LaserJet products, you might be accustomed to configuring Tray 1
to First mode or Cassette mode. On HP LaserJet P3010 Series printers, setting Tray 1 to ANY SIZE
and ANY TYPE is equivalent to First mode. Setting Tray 1 to a setting other than ANY SIZE or ANY
TYPE is equivalent to Cassette mode.
Menu item

Value

Description

TRAY 1 SIZE

Select a paper size from the list.

Configure the paper size for Tray 1. The
default is ANY SIZE. See the product user
guide for a complete list of available sizes.

TRAY 1 TYPE

Select a paper type from the list.

Configure the paper type for Tray 1. The
default is ANY TYPE. See the product user
guide for a complete list of available types.

TRAY  SIZE

Select a paper size from the list.

Configure the paper size for the indicated
tray. The default size is LETTER or A4,
depending on your country/region. See the
product user guide for a complete list of
available sizes.

Select a paper type from the list.

Configure the paper type for the indicated
tray. The default is PLAIN. See the product
user guide for a complete list of available
types.

X = 2 or optional 3 or 4

TRAY  TYPE
X = 2 or optional 3 or 4

Manage supplies menu
Use this menu to configure how the product alerts you when supplies are approaching the estimated
end of life.
To display: Press the Menu button

, and then select the MANAGE SUPPLIES menu.

NOTE: Values that have an asterisk (*) are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no
default.

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting 177

Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

AT VERY LOW

BLACK CARTRIDGE

STOP

Select what the product should
do when the print cartridge is very
near the end of its estimated life.

PROMPT TO CONTINUE
CONTINUE*

STOP: The product stops until
you replace the cartridge.
PROMPT TO CONTINUE: The
product stops until you clear the
prompt message.
CONTINUE: The product
provides an alert message, but it
continues printing.

USER DEFINED LOW

BLACK CARTRIDGE

Use the arrow buttons or the
numeric keypad to enter the
percentage of estimated
cartridge life at which you want
the product to alert you.

Configure device menu
Use the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu for the following tasks:
●

Change the default printing settings.

●

Adjust the print quality.

●

Change the system configuration and I/O options.

●

Reset the default settings.

Printing menu
These settings affect only jobs without identified properties. Most jobs identify all of the properties and
override the values set from this menu.
To display: Press the Menu button
PRINTING menu.

, select the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, and then select the

NOTE: Values that have an asterisk (*) are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no
default.
Menu item

Values

Description

COPIES

Range: 1 - 32000

Set the default number of copies for print
jobs. The default number is 1.

DEFAULT PAPER SIZE

A list of available sizes appears.

Set the default paper size.

DEFAULT CUSTOM PAPER SIZE

●

UNIT OF MEASURE

Set the default size for any custom print job.

●

X DIMENSION

●

Y DIMENSION

178 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Menu item

Values

Description

DUPLEX

OFF*

Enable or disable two-sided printing.

ON

NOTE: This menu is available only on the
d, dn, and x models.

LONG EDGE*

Change the binding edge for two-sided
printing.

DUPLEX BINDING

SHORT EDGE
NOTE: This menu is available only on the
d, dn, and x models.
OVERRIDE A4/LETTER

NO

Set the product to print an A4 job on lettersize paper when no A4 paper is loaded.

YES*
MANUAL FEED

OFF*

Makes the MANUAL FEED setting the
default for jobs that do not select a tray.

ON
EDGE TO EDGE OVERRIDE

NO*

COURIER FONT

WIDE A4

YES

Change the printable area of Letter and A4size paper to 2 mm from the left and right
edges for single-sided printing. The
standard printable area is 4 mm from the
left and right edges.

REGULAR*

Select a version of the Courier font.

DARK

The DARK setting is an internal Courier
font available on HP LaserJet Series III
printers and older.

NO *

Change the printable area of A4 paper.

YES

NO: The printable area is seventy-eight 10pitch characters on a single line.
YES: The printable area is eighty 10-pitch
characters on a single line.

PRINT PS ERRORS

OFF*

Print PS error pages.

ON
PRINT PDF ERRORS

OFF*

Print PDF error pages.

ON

PCL sub-menu
This menu configures settings for the printer control language.
To display: Press the Menu button , select the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, select the PRINTING
menu, and then select the PCL menu.
NOTE: Values that have an asterisk (*) are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no
default.
Item
FORM LENGTH

ENWW

Values

Description
Sets vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for default paper
size. The default is 60.

Tools for troubleshooting 179

Item

Values

Description

ORIENTATION

PORTRAIT*

Set the default page orientation.

LANDSCAPE
FONT SOURCE

A list of available font sources
displays.

Selects the font source. The default is INTERNAL.

FONT NUMBER

The product assigns a number to each font and lists the
numbers on the PCL font list. The range is 0 to 102. The
default is 0.

FONT PITCH

Selects the font pitch. This item might not appear, depending
on the font selected. The range is 0.44 to 99.99. The default
is 10.00.

SYMBOL SET

A list of available symbol sets
displays.

Selects any one of several available symbol sets at the
product control panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping of
all the characters in a font. PC-8 or PC-850 is recommended
for line-draw characters. The default is PC-8.

APPEND CR TO LF

NO*

Append a carriage return to each line-feed that is
encountered in backward-compatible PCL jobs (pure text, no
job control). Some environments indicate a new line by only
the line-feed control code.

YES

SUPPRESS BLANK PAGES

NO*

When generating your own PCL, extra form feeds are
included that would cause a blank page to be printed. Select
YES for form feeds to be ignored if the page is blank.

YES
MEDIA SOURCE MAPPING

The PCL5 MEDIA SOURCE MAPPING command selects an
input tray by a number that maps to the various available
trays and feeders.
STANDARD*

The numbering is based on newer HP LaserJet printers with
updated changes to the numbering of trays and feeders.

CLASSIC

The numbering is based on HP LaserJet 4 printers and earlier
models.

Print Quality menu
To display: Press the Menu button
PRINT QUALITY menu.

, select the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, and then select the

NOTE: Values that have an asterisk (*) are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no
default.
Item

Sub-item

SET
REGISTRATION

180 Chapter 3 Solve problems

Sub-item

Values

Description
For each tray, setting the registration
shifts the margin alignment to center the
image on the page from top to bottom and
from left to right. You can also align the
image on the front with the image printed
on the back.

ENWW

Item

Sub-item

Sub-item

Values

Description

ADJUST TRAY 

PRINT TEST PAGE

Shift from -20 to 20
along the X or Y
axes. 0 is the
default.

Print a test page and perform the
alignment procedure for each tray.

X1 SHIFT
Y1 SHIFT
X2 SHIFT
Y2 SHIFT

When it creates an image, the product
scans across the page from side to side
as the sheet feeds from top to bottom into
the product.
The scan direction is referred to as X. X1
is the scan direction for a single-sided
page or for the first side of a two-sided
page. X2 is the scan direction for the
second side of a two-sided page.
The feed direction is referred to as Y. Y1
is the feed direction for a single-sided
page or for the first side of a two-sided
page. Y2 is the feed direction for the
second side of a two-sided page.

FUSER MODES

A list of paper types
displays.

NORMAL
HIGH2
HIGH1
LOW

Each paper type has a default fuser
mode. Change the fuser mode only if you
are experiencing problems printing on
certain paper types. After you select a
type of paper, you can select a fuser mode
that is available for that type.

LOW1
RESTORE MODES

Return all fuser-mode settings to the
factory-default settings.

OPTIMIZE

Optimize various print modes to solve
print-quality issues.
RESTORE OPTIMIZE

RESOLUTION

Return all the settings in the OPTIMIZE
menu to the factory-default values.
300

Sets the resolution at which the product
prints.

600
300: Produces draft print quality.
FASTRES 1200*
PRORES 1200

600: Produces high print quality for text.
FASTRES 1200: Produces 1200-dpi print
quality for fast, high-quality printing of
business text and graphics.
PRORES 1200: Produces 1200-dpi print
quality for fast, high-quality printing of line
art and graphic images.

RET

OFF
LIGHT
MEDIUM*
DARK

ENWW

Use the Resolution Enhancement
technology (REt) setting to produce print
with smooth angles, curves, and edges.
REt does not affect print quality if the
resolution is set to the FASTRES 1200 or
PRORES 1200 settings. All other print
resolutions benefit from REt.

Tools for troubleshooting 181

Item

Sub-item

ECONOMODE

Sub-item

Values

Description

OFF*

EconoMode is a feature that allows the
product to use less toner per page.
Selecting this option extends the life of the
toner supply and might reduce the cost
per page. However, it also reduces print
quality. The printed page is adequate for
printing drafts.

ON

HP does not recommend full-time use of
EconoMode. If EconoMode is used fulltime, the toner supply might outlast the
mechanical parts in the print cartridge. If
print quality begins to degrade under
these circumstances, you will need to
install a new print cartridge, even if there
is toner supply remaining in the cartridge.
TONER DENSITY

1 to 5

Lighten or darken the print on the page.
The lightest setting is 1, and the darkest
setting is 5. The default setting of 3 usually
produces the best results.

AUTO CLEANING

OFF*

When auto-cleaning is on, the product
prints a cleaning page when the page
count reaches the CLEANING
INTERVAL setting.

ON

CLEANING
INTERVAL

500*
1000
2000

When AUTO CLEANING is on, this
option specifies the number of pages that
are printed before a cleaning page is
automatically printed.

5000
10000
20000
AUTO CLEANING
SIZE

LETTER*
A4

CREATE
CLEANING PAGE

When AUTO CLEANING is on, this
option specifies the paper size that is
used to print the cleaning page.
Prints a page of instructions for cleaning
excess toner off the pressure roller in the
fuser.
NOTE: Only available for non-duplex
products.

PROCESS
CLEANING PAGE

182 Chapter 3 Solve problems

Create and process a cleaning page for
cleaning the pressure roller in the fuser.
When the cleaning process runs, a
cleaning page is printed. This page can be
discarded.

ENWW

System setup menu
Use the SYSTEM SETUP menu to change product-configuration defaults such as sleep mode, product
personality (language), and jam recovery.
To display: Press the Menu button
SYSTEM SETUP menu.

, select the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, and then select the

NOTE: Values that have an asterisk (*) are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no
default.
Item

Sub-item

Values

Description

DATE/TIME

DATE

- - - - /[MMM]/[DD] YEAR =

Set the correct date. The range for
the year is 2009 to 2037.

[YYYY]/- - - /[DD] MONTH=
[YYYY]/[MMM]/- - DAY=
DATE FORMAT

YYYY/MMM/DD*
MMM/DD/YYYY

Choose the order in which the
year, month, and day appear in the
date.

DD/MMM/YYYY
TIME

- - :[MM] [PM] HOUR =

Select a configuration for
displaying the time.

[HH]: - - [PM] MINUTE=
[HH]:[MM] - - AM/PM=
TIME FORMAT

12 HOUR*

Select whether to use the 12
HOUR or the 24 HOUR format.

24 HOUR
JOB STORAGE LIMIT

Continuous value
Range: 1–100

Specify the number of Quick Copy
jobs that can be stored on the
product.

Default = 32
JOB HELD TIMEOUT

OFF*
1 HOUR
4 HOURS
1 DAY

Set the amount of time that Quick
Copy jobs are kept before being
automatically deleted from the
queue. This menu item only
appears when a hard disk is
installed.

1 WEEK
SHOW ADDRESS

AUTO
OFF*

QUIET MODE

OFF*
ON

TRAY BEHAVIOR

ENWW

Specify whether the product’s IP
address is shown on the display
with the Ready message.
Reduce noise during printing.
When this setting is turned on, the
product prints at a slower speed.
Control how the product handles
paper trays and related prompts at
the control panel.

Tools for troubleshooting 183

Item

Sub-item

Values

Description

USE REQUESTED TRAY

EXCLUSIVELY*

Set how to handle jobs that have
specified an input tray.

FIRST

MANUALLY FEED PROMPT

ALWAYS*
UNLESS LOADED

PS DEFER MEDIA

ENABLED*
DISABLED

SIZE/TYPE PROMPT

DISPLAY*
DO NOT DISPLAY

184 Chapter 3 Solve problems

●

EXCLUSIVELY: The product
never selects a different tray
when the user has indicated
that a specific tray should be
used, even if that tray is
empty.

●

FIRST: The product can pull
from another tray if the
specified tray is empty, even
though the user specifically
indicated a tray for the job.

Specify when a manual feed
message should appear when the
type or size for a job does not
match the size or type configured
for Tray 1.
●

ALWAYS: A prompt always
appears before printing a
manual-feed job.

●

UNLESS LOADED: A
message appears only if the
multipurpose tray is empty or
does not match the size or
type of the job.

Specify how paper is handled
when printing from an Adobe PS
print driver.
●

ENABLED: Use HP’s paperhandling model.

●

DISABLED: Use the Adobe
PS paper-handling model.

Specify whether the tray
configuration message appears
whenever a tray is closed.
●

DISPLAY: The tray
configuration message
displays when a tray is
closed. You can configure the
tray size or type directly from
this message.

●

DO NOT DISPLAY: The tray
configuration message does
not display.

ENWW

Item

Sub-item

Values

Description

USE ANOTHER TRAY

ENABLED*

Turn on or off the control-panel
prompt to select another tray when
the specified tray is empty.

DISABLED

DUPLEX BLANK PAGES

AUTO*

●

ENABLED: The product
prompts either to add paper to
the selected tray or to choose
a different tray.

●

DISABLED: The product
prompts the user to add paper
to the tray that was initially
selected.

Control how the product handles
two-sided jobs (duplexing).

YES

IMAGE ROTATION

STANDARD*
ALTERNATE

SLEEP DELAY

1 MINUTE
15 MINUTES

●

AUTO: Enables Smart
Duplexing, which instructs
the product not to process
both sides if the second side
is blank. This can improve
print speed.

●

YES: Disables Smart
Duplexing and forces the
duplexer to flip the sheet of
paper even if it is printed on
only one side.

Select the ALTERNATE setting if
you are having trouble aligning
images on preprinted forms.
Reduces power consumption
when the product has been
inactive for the selected period.

30 MINUTES*
45 MINUTES
60 MINUTES
90 MINUTES
2 HOURS
WAKE TIME



OFF*

Configure the daily wake time for
the product.

CUSTOM
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS

Range is 1 through 10.

Set the brightness of the control
panel display. The default is 5.

PERSONALITY

AUTO*

Set the default personality.

PCL
PDF
PS

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting 185

Item

Sub-item

CLEARABLE WARNINGS

Values

Description

JOB*

Sets whether a warning is cleared
on the control panel or when
another job is sent.

ON
AUTO CONTINUE

OFF
ON*

JAM RECOVERY

AUTO*

Determines product behavior
when the system generates an
Auto Continuable error.
Set whether the product tries to
reprint pages after a jam.

OFF
ON

RAM DISK

AUTO*
OFF

AUTO: The product reprints pages
if enough memory is available for
full-speed two-sided printing.
Sets how the RAM disk feature is
configured. This is only available if
there is no hard disk installed and
the printer has at least 8 MB of
memory.
AUTO: The product determines
the optimal RAM disk size based
on the amount of available
memory.
OFF: The RAM disk is disabled,
but a minimal RAM disk is still
active.

LANGUAGE

186 Chapter 3 Solve problems

A listing of available languages
appears.

Set the language for the product.
The default language is
ENGLISH.

ENWW

I/O menu
Items on the I/O (input/output) menu affect the communication between the product and the computer.
If the product contains an HP Jetdirect print server, you can configure basic networking parameters by
using this submenu. You can also configure these and other parameters through HP Web Jetadmin or
the embedded Web server.
For more information on these options, see the product user guide.
To display: Press the Menu button
O menu.

, select the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, and then select the I/

NOTE: Values that have an asterisk (*) are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no
default.
Item

Sub-item

I/O TIMEOUT

Values

Description

Range: 5 - 300

Set the product I/O TIMEOUT in
seconds. The default is 15
seconds.
Adjust timeout for the best
performance. If data from other
ports appears in the middle of your
print job, increase the timeout
value.

EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU

See the next table for a list of options.

EIO  JETDIRECT MENU

Embedded Jetdirect and EIO  Jetdirect menus
Item

Sub-item

INFORMATION

PRINT SEC PAGE

Sub-item

Values

Description

YES*

YES: Prints a page that contains the current
security settings on the HP Jetdirect print
server.

NO

NO: A security settings page is not printed.
TCP/IP

ENABLE

HOST NAME

ENWW

ON*

ON: Enable the TCP/IP protocol.

OFF

OFF: Disable the TCP/IP protocol.
An alphanumeric string, up to 32 characters,
used to identify the product. This name is
listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page.
The default host name is NPIxxxxxx, where
xxxxxx is the last six digits of the LAN
hardware (MAC) address.

Tools for troubleshooting 187

Item

Sub-item

Sub-item

Values

Description

IPV4 SETTINGS

CONFIG METHOD

BOOTP

Specify the method that TCP/IPv4
parameters are configured on the
HP Jetdirect print server.

DHCP*
AUTO IP
MANUAL

BOOTP: Automatic configuration from a
BootP (Bootstrap Protocol) server.
DHCP: Automatic configuration from a
DHCPv4 (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol) server. If selected and a DHCP
lease exists, the DHCP RELEASE and
DHCP RENEW menus are available to set
DHCP lease options.
AUTO IP: Automatic link-local IPv4
addressing. An address in the form
169.254.x.x is assigned automatically.
MANUAL: Use the MANUAL SETTINGS
menu to configure TCP/IPv4 parameters.

MANUAL
SETTINGS

IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
DEFAULT
GATEWAY

(Available only if the CONFIG METHOD
menu is set to the MANUAL option)
Configure parameters directly from the
product control panel:
IP ADDRESS: The unique IP address
(n.n.n.n) of the product, where n is a value
from 0 to 255.
SUBNET MASK: The subnet mask (n.n.n.n)
for the product, where n is a value from 0 to
255.
DEFAULT GATEWAY: The IP address of the
gateway or router used for communications
with other networks.

DEFAULT IP

AUTO IP*
LEGACY

Specify the IP address to default to when the
print server is unable to obtain an IP address
from the network during a forced TCP/IP
reconfiguration (for example, when manually
configured to use BootP or DHCP).
NOTE: This feature assigns a static IP
address that might interfere with a managed
network.
AUTO IP: A link-local IP address 169.254.x.x
is set.
LEGACY: The address 192.0.0.192 is set,
consistent with older HP Jetdirect products.

DHCP RELEASE

YES

Specify whether to release the current DHCP
lease and the leased IP address.

NO*
NOTE: This menu displays if the CONFIG
METHOD is set to the DHCP option and a
DHCP lease for the print server exists.

188 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Item

Sub-item

Sub-item

Values

Description

DHCP RENEW

YES

Specify whether the print server requests to
renew the DHCP lease.

NO*
NOTE: This menu appears if the CONFIG
METHOD menu is set to the DHCP option
and a DHCP lease for the print server exists.

IPV6 SETTINGS

PRIMARY DNS

Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Primary
DNS Server.

SECONDARY DNS

Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a
Secondary Domain Name System (DNS)
Server.

ENABLE

ON*

Enable or disable IPv6 operation on the print
server.

OFF
ADDRESS

MANUAL
SETTINGS

Enable and manually configure a TCP/IPv6
address.

●

ENABLE

●

ADDRESS

ENABLE: Choose ON to enable manual
configuration, or OFF to disable manual
configuration. The default is OFF.
ADDRESS: Type a 32 hexadecimal digit IPv6
node address that uses the colon
hexadecimal syntax.

DHCPV6 POLICY

ROUTER
SPECIFIED*
ROUTER
UNAVAILABLE
ALWAYS

ROUTER SPECIFIED: The stateful autoconfiguration method to be used by the print
server is determined by a router. The router
specifies whether the print server obtains its
address, its configuration information, or both
from a DHCPv6 server.
ROUTER UNAVAILABLE: If a router is not
available, the print server should attempt to
obtain its stateful configuration from a
DHCPv6 server.
ALWAYS: Whether or not a router is
available, the print server always attempts to
obtain its stateful configuration from a
DHCPv6 server.

ENWW

PRIMARY DNS

Specify an IPv6 address for a primary DNS
server that the print server should use.

SECONDARY DNS

Specify an IPv6 address for a secondary DNS
server that the print server should use.

Tools for troubleshooting 189

Item

Sub-item

Sub-item

Values

PROXY SERVER

Description
Specifies the proxy server to be used by
embedded applications in the product. A
proxy server is typically used by network
clients for Internet access. It caches Web
pages, and provides a degree of Internet
security, for those clients.
To specify a proxy server, enter its IPv4
address or fully-qualified domain name. The
name can be up to 255 octets.
For some networks, you might need to
contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP)
for the proxy server address.

IPX/SPX

PROXY PORT

Type the port number used by the proxy
server for client support. The port number
identifies the port reserved for proxy activity
on your network, and can be a value from 0
to 65535.

IDLE TIMEOUT

Configure the time period, in seconds, after
which an idle TCP print data connection is
closed (default is 270 seconds, 0 disables the
timeout).

ENABLE

ON*

Enable or disable the IPX/SPX protocol.

OFF
FRAME TYPE

AUTO*

Select the frame-type setting for your
network.

EN_8023
EN_II
EN_8022

APPLETALK

ENABLE

AUTO: Automatically sets and limits the
frame type to the first one detected.

EN_SNAP

EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022, and EN_SNAP
are frame-type selections for Ethernet
networks

ON*

Configures an AppleTalk network.

OFF
DLC/LLC

ENABLE

ON*

Enable or disable the DLC/LLC protocol.

OFF
SECURITY

SECURE WEB

IPSEC

HTTPS REQUIRED*
HTTPS OPTIONAL

For configuration management, specify
whether the embedded Web server will
accept communications using HTTPS
(Secure HTTP) only, or both HTTP and
HTTPS.

KEEP

Specify the IPSec status on the print server.

DISABLE*

KEEP: IPSec status remains the same as
currently configured.
DISABLE: IPSec operation on the print
server is disabled.

802.1X

RESET
KEEP*

190 Chapter 3 Solve problems

Specify whether to keep the 802.1X settings
on the print server or to reset them to the
factory defaults.

ENWW

Item

Sub-item

Sub-item

RESET SECURITY

Values

Description

YES

Specify whether the current security settings
on the print server will be saved or reset to
factory defaults.

NO*
DIAGNOSTICS

EMBEDDED TESTS

This menu provides tests to help diagnose
network hardware or TCP/IP network
connection problems.
Embedded tests help to identify whether a
network fault is internal or external to the
product. Use an embedded test to check
hardware and communication paths on the
print server. After you select and enable a test
and set the execution time, you must select
the EXECUTE option to initiate the test.
Depending on the execution time, a selected
test runs continuously until either the product
is turned off, or an error occurs and a
diagnostic page is printed.
LAN HW TEST

YES

CAUTION: Running this embedded test will
erase your TCP/IP configuration.

NO*
Perform an internal loopback test, which
sends and receives packets only on the
internal network hardware. There are no
external transmissions on your network.
HTTP TEST

YES
NO*

SNMP TEST

YES
NO*

DATA PATH TEST

SELECT ALL
TESTS

YES

Check operation of HTTP by retrieving
predefined pages from the product, and test
the embedded Web server.
Check operation of SNMP communications
by accessing predefined SNMP objects on
the product.

NO*

Identify data path and corruption problems on
an HP postscript level 3 emulation product.
This test sends a predefined PS file to the
product. However, the test is paperless; the
file does not print.

YES

Select all available embedded tests.

NO*
EXECUTION TIME
[M]

Specify the length of time (in minutes) that an
embedded test will run. You can select a
value from 0 to 24 minutes. If you select zero
(0), the test runs indefinitely until an error
occurs or the product is turned off.
Data gathered from the HTTP, SNMP, and
Data Path tests is printed after the tests have
completed.

EXECUTE

YES

Select whether to initiate the selected tests.

NO*

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting 191

Item

Sub-item

Sub-item

Values

PING TEST

Description
Check network communications. This test
sends link-level packets to a remote network
host, then waits for an appropriate response.
To run a ping test, set the following items:

DEST TYPE

IPV4

Specify whether the target product is an IPv4
or IPv6 node.

IPV6
DEST IPV4

Type the IPv4 address.

DEST IPV6

Type the IPv6 address.

PACKET SIZE

Specify the size of each packet, in bytes, to
be sent to the remote host. The minimum is
64 (default) and the maximum is 2048.

TIMEOUT

Specify the length of time, in seconds, to wait
for a response from the remote host. The
default is 1 and the maximum is 100.

COUNT

Specify the number of ping test packets to
send for this test. Select a value from 0 to 100.
The default is 4. To configure the test to run
continuously, select 0.

PRINT RESULTS

YES

If the ping test was not set for continuous
operation, you can print the test results.

NO*
EXECUTE

YES

Specify whether to initiate the ping test.

NO*
PING RESULTS

192 Chapter 3 Solve problems

View the ping test status and results on the
control panel display. You can select the
following items:
PACKETS SENT

Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535)
sent to the remote host since the most recent
test was initiated or completed. The default is
0.

PACKETS
RECEIVED

Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535)
received from the remote host since the most
recent test was initiated or completed. The
default is 0.

PERCENT LOST

Shows the percent (0 to 100) of ping test
packets that were sent with no response from
the remote host since the most recent test
was initiated or completed. The default is 0.

RTT MIN

Shows the minimum detected round-triptime (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for
packet transmission and response. The
default is 0.

RTT MAX

Shows the maximum detected round-triptime (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for
packet transmission and response. The
default is 0.

ENWW

Item

Sub-item

Sub-item

Values

RTT AVERAGE

PING IN
PROGRESS

Description
Shows the average round-trip-time (RTT),
from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet
transmission and response. The default is 0.

YES

Select whether the control panel indicates
when a ping test is in progress.

NO*
REFRESH

YES
NO*

LINK SPEED

AUTO*
10T HALF
10T FULL
100TX HALF
100TX FULL
100TX AUTO
1000TX FULL

When viewing the ping test results, this item
updates the ping test data with current
results. A refresh automatically occurs when
the menu times out or you manually return to
the main menu.
The link speed and communication mode of
the print server must match the network. The
available settings depend on the product and
installed print server.
CAUTION: If you change the link setting,
network communications with the print server
and network product might be lost.
AUTO: The print server uses autonegotiation to configure itself with the highest
link speed and communication mode
allowed. If auto-negotiation fails, either
100TX HALF or 10T HALF is set depending
on the detected link speed of the hub/switch
port. (A 1000T half-duplex selection is not
supported.)
10T HALF: 10 Mbps, half-duplex operation.
10T FULL: 10 Mbps, full-duplex operation.
100TX HALF: 100 Mbps, half-duplex
operation.
100TX FULL: 100 Mbps, full-duplex
operation.
100TX AUTO: Limits auto-negotiation to a
maximum link speed of 100 Mbps.
1000TX FULL: 1000 Mbps, full-duplex
operation.

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting 193

Resets menu
Use the RESETS menu to reset factory settings, disable and enable sleep mode, and update the product
after new supplies are installed.
To display: Press the Menu button
RESETS menu.

, select the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, and then select the

NOTE: Values that have an asterisk (*) are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no
default.
Item

Sub-item

Values

RESTORE FACTORY
SETTINGS

Description
Clear the page buffer, remove all
perishable personality data,
reset the printing environment,
and return all default settings to
factory defaults.

SLEEP MODE

OFF
ON*

Select whether the product can
enter sleep mode. If you turn this
setting off, you cannot change
any settings in the SLEEP
DELAY menu.

Diagnostics menu
Use the DIAGNOSTICS menu to run tests that can help you identify and solve problems with the product.
To display: Press the Menu button

, and then select the DIAGNOSTICS menu.

NOTE: Values that have an asterisk (*) are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no
default.
Item

Sub-item

Values

Description

PRINT EVENT LOG

Prints a report containing the last
50 entries in the product’s event
log, starting with the most recent.

SHOW EVENT LOG

Displays the last 50 events; the
most recent event is listed first.

PAPER PATH SENSORS

Performs a test on each of the
product’s sensors to determine if
they are working correctly and
displays the status of each sensor.

PAPER PATH TEST

Tests the paper-handling features
of the product, such as the
configuration of the trays.
PRINT TEST PAGE

194 Chapter 3 Solve problems

Generates a page for testing the
paper-handling features. You must
define the path for the test to test
specific paper paths.

ENWW

Item

Sub-item

Values

Description

SOURCE

ALL TRAYS

Specifies whether the test page is
printed from all trays or from a
specific tray.

TRAY 1
TRAY 2*
TRAY 3
TRAY 4
DUPLEX

OFF

Determines whether the duplexer
is used in the test.

ON
COPIES

1*
10

Determines how many pages
should be sent from the specified
source as part of the test.

50
100
500
MANUAL SENSOR TEST

Performs tests to determine
whether the paper-path sensors
are operating correctly.

MANUAL SENSOR
TEST 2

Performs additional tests to
determine whether the paper-path
sensors are operating correctly.

COMPONENT TEST

PRINT/STOP TEST

PRINT FUSER TEST
PAGE

ENWW

A list of available components
appears.

Activate individual parts
independently to isolate noise and
other hardware issues.
Range is 0 - 60,000 milliseconds.
The default is 0.

Isolates print quality faults more
accurately by stopping the product
in midprint cycle, which allows you
to see where the image begins to
degrade. This causes a jam
message that might need to be
manually cleared. A service
representative should perform this
test.
Tests the fuser for offset problems
or contamination.

Tools for troubleshooting 195

Service menu
The SERVICE menu is PIN-protected for added security. Only authorized service people have access
to the SERVICE menu. When you select SERVICE from the list of menus, the product prompts you to
type an eight-digit PIN number.
●

The PIN for the HP LaserJet P3015 models is 07301509.

1.

Press the Menu button

2.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
then press the OK button.

3.

Type the PIN using the alphanumeric keypad (for the base model, use the arrow keys).

4.

Press the OK button to accept the PIN and open the SERVICE menu.

.
button to navigate to the SERVICE menu, and

The following menu items appear in the SERVICE menu:
●

CLEAR EVENT LOG: Use this item to clear the product event log.

●

CLEAR BOOTLOADER PASSWORD: Use this item to clear the password that was set to prevent
someone from performing an unauthorized cold reset, resetting factory defaults, or changing sleep
mode settings from the RESETS menu.

●

TOTAL PAGE COUNT: After replacing the formatter, use this item to reset the page count so that
the figure continues to represent the page count for the product engine.

●

REFURBISH CYCLE COUNT: Use this item to record the page count when the product was
refurbished.

●

SERIAL NUMBER: After replacing the formatter, use this item to reset the product serial number.

●

SERVICE ID: See Service ID on page 261, Restore service ID on page 261, and Convert the
service ID to an actual date on page 261.

●

COLD RESET PAPER: Select this item to rest the default paper size when the formatter is replaced
or factory settings are restored (see Resets menu on page 194).
When a formatter is replaced or factory settings are restored in a country/region that uses A4 as
the standard paper size, use this item to reset the default paper size.

196 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Interpret control-panel messages
Control-panel message types
Four types of control-panel messages can indicate the status of or problems with the product.
Message type

Description

Status messages

Status messages reflect the current state of the product. They inform you of normal product operation
and require no interaction to clear them. They change as the state of the product changes. Whenever
the product is ready, not busy, and has no pending warning messages, the status message Ready
appears if the product is online.

Warning messages

Warning messages inform you of data and scan errors. These messages typically alternate with the
Ready or status messages and remain until you touch the OK button. Some warning messages are
clearable. If CLEARABLE WARNINGS is set to JOB on the product SYSTEM SETUP menu, the
next job clears these messages.

Error messages

Error messages communicate that some action must be performed, such as clearing a jam.
Some error messages are auto-continuable. If AUTO CONTINUE is set on the menus, the device will
continue normal operation after an auto-continuable error message appears for 10 seconds.
NOTE: Pressing any button during the 10-second auto-continuable error message overrides the
auto-continue feature, and the button function takes precedence. For example, pressing the stop
button pauses scanning and offers the option to cancel the job.

Critical-error messages

Critical error messages inform you of a product failure. Some of these messages can be cleared by
turning the product off and then on. These messages are not affected by the AUTO CONTINUE
setting. If a critical error persists, service is required.

Control-panel messages
Table 3-7 Control-panel messages
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

10.10.00 ERROR

The product cannot read or write to the print
cartridge e-label, or the e-label is missing
from the print cartridge.

1.

Verify that a genuine HP print cartridge
is installed in the product.

2.

Install another print cartridge.

3.

Verify that the memory tag PCA is
installed in the product.

4.

Verify that the memory tag connector is
firmly seated in connector J1703 on the
ECU. You might have to remove the
main cooling fan to see this connection.

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting 197

Table 3-7 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

10.91.00 CARTRIDGE ERROR

An error has occurred in the cartridge

1.

Open the cartridge door.

2.

Remove the print cartridge, and then
reinstall it.

3.

Close the cartridge door.

4.

Turn the product off and then on.

5.

Verify that a genuine HP print cartridge
is installed in the product.

6.

Install another print cartridge.

7.

Verify that the memory tag PCA is
installed in the product.

8.

Verify that the memory tag connector is
firmly seated in connector J1703 on the
ECU. You might have to remove the
main cooling fan to see this connection.

1.

Open the cartridge door.

2.

Remove the print cartridge, and then
reinstall it.

3.

Close the cartridge door.

4.

Turn the product off and then on.

5.

Verify that a genuine HP print cartridge
is installed in the product.

6.

Verify that the memory tag PCA is
installed in the product.

7.

Verify that the memory tag connector is
firmly seated in connector J1703 on the
ECU. You might have to remove the
main cooling fan to see this connection.

8.

Install another print cartridge.

REPLACE BLACK CARTRIDGE

10.XX.YY SUPPLY MEMORY ERROR

The product cannot read or write to the print
cartridge memory tag, or the memory tag is
missing.
10.00.0Y = memory is defective
10.10.0Y = memory is missing

11.XX INTERNAL CLOCK ERROR

The real time clock has experienced an error.

To continue press OK

XX = 01: Dead clock battery

Printing can continue, but a prompt appears
every time you turn on the product. To resolve
the issue:

XX = 02: Dead real time clock

1.

Power cycle the product to see if the
prompt clears.

2.

If possible, print a configuration page to
record product information, and then
perform an NVRAM initialization routine.
If the initialization routine is successful,
you must re-enter several configuration
parameters (such as the page count and
the serial number).

3.

If the error persists, replace the
formatter PCA.

198 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Table 3-7 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

13.JJ.NT JAM IN 

A jam has occurred in the specified location.

13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE 

●

Remove the jammed paper. See Jam
locations on page 220.

13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE REAR DOOR

●

13.JJ.NT JAM IN FUSER

●

13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE TOP COVER

●

13.JJ.NT JAM IN TRAY 1

●

13.JJ.NT JAM IN TRAY 

●

13.JJ.NT JAM IN TRAY 2

●

13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE DUPLEXER

13.JJ.NT PAPER JAM OPEN INPUT
TRAYS

1.

Open each tray and check for jammed
paper.

alternates with

2.

Open the cartridge door.

Open all trays

3.

Remove the print cartridge and any
paper.

4.

Reinstall the print cartridge and close
the cartridge door.

5.

Close all trays.

6.

Remove the jammed paper. See Jam
locations on page 220.

7.

If the message persists after you have
cleared all jams, a sensor might be stuck
or broken. See Paper-path test (and
automatic sensors test) on page 136 or
Sensor test (interactive) on page 137.

1.

Press the OK button to print the
transferred data (some data might be
lost).

2.

If this message displays often, simplify
the print job or install more memory.

1.

Press the OK button to clear the
message. (The job does not print.)

2.

Check the host configuration. If the
message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.

21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX

A jam has occurred in a tray.

If the message persists after you have
cleared all jams, a sensor might be stuck or
broken. See Paper-path test (and automatic
sensors test) on page 136 or Sensor test
(interactive) on page 137.

The data in the print job is too complex.

For help press
alternates with
21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX
To continue press OK
22 EIO X BUFFER OVERFLOW
To continue press OK

Too much data was sent to the EIO card in
the specified slot [X]. An improper
communications protocol might be in use.
Note: EIO 0 is reserved for the HP Jetdirect
embedded print server.

22 EMBEDDED I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW

Too much data was sent to the product's
internal HP Jetdirect.

Press the OK button to continue printing.
Some data might be lost.

Too much data was sent to the USB port.

Press the OK button to clear the error
message. (The job does not print.)

To continue press OK
22 USB I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW
To continue press OK

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting 199

Table 3-7 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

40 EIO X BAD TRANSMISSION

The connection has been broken between
the product and the EIO card in the specified
slot [X].

Press the OK button to clear the error
message and continue printing.

To continue press OK

Note: EIO 0 is reserved for the HP Jetdirect
embedded print server.
40 EMBEDDED I/O BAD TRANSMISSION

The connection has been broken between
the product and HP Jetdirect print server.

1.

Print the configuration and Embedded
JetDirect pages to verify that the card
status is “Ready,” and that the protocol
reads “Ready.”

2.

Verify that all the configuration
parameters (IP address, configuration
method, and domain) are correct.

3.

Verify that you are using a working
network cable.

4.

Verify you can “ping” a network address
from the product.

5.

Verify that the HP JetDirect print server
has the latest firmware. HP JetDirect
firmware is part of the product firmware.
Find the latest product firmware at
www.hp.com.

To continue press OK

41.3 UNEXPECTED SIZE IN TRAY 1

You have configured Tray 1 for a different
size of paper than the print job requires.

Reload the tray with the correct paper size.

MANUALLY FEED  

If another tray contains the correct size, the
NOTE: This error can be caused by a multi product prompts you to press the OK button
feed problem. Open, and then close, the
to use another tray.
cartridge door to clear the error message. If
the error persists, and the tray is correctly
configured, try cleaning the Tray 1 pickup
roller (or you might have to replace the roller).

41.3 UNEXPECTED SIZE IN TRAY 

You have configured the tray for a different
size of paper than the print job requires.

1.

Reload the tray with the correct paper
size.

For help press
alternates with
LOAD TRAY  [TYPE] [SIZE]
To use another tray press OK

200 Chapter 3 Solve problems

NOTE: This error can be caused by a multi 2.
feed problem. Open, and then close, the
cartridge door to clear the error message. If
the error persists, and the tray is correctly
configured, try cleaning the Tray 1 pickup
roller (or you might have to replace the roller). 3.

Make sure the paper size that is
specified in the software program, the
printer driver, and the control panel are
all the same.
Press the OK button and scroll to the
TRAY  SIZE =  option.
Reconfigure the size in a tray to match
the size required for the print job.

4.

If the error does not clear, turn the
product off and then on.

5.

If the message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.

ENWW

Table 3-7 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

41.X ERROR

A temporary printing error occurred.

1.

Press the OK button to see if the page
will print. If necessary, turn the product
off and then on.

2.

Verify that the correct size paper is
loaded in the input tray.

3.

Verify that the loaded paper meets
HP specifications. If the paper sticks
together, the paper defect sensors will
detect a sheet of paper longer than what
is expected in the product.

4.

Verify that all paper size settings on the
control panel, in the print driver settings,
and in the software program match.

1.

Turn off the product, and then turn it on.

2.

to clear the
Press the stop button
print job from the product memory.

3.

Turn off the product, and then turn it on.

4.

Print a document from a different
software program. If the job prints,
return to the first program and try to print
a different file. If the message displays
only with a certain program or print job,
contact the software vendor for
assistance.

5.

If the message persists with different
software programs and print jobs,
disconnect the cables to the product that
connect it to the network or computer.

6.

Turn off the product.

7.

Remove all EIO devices from the
product.

8.

Turn on the product.

9.

If the error no longer exists, replace
each EIO device one at a time, making
sure to turn the product off and on again
as you install each device.

For help press
alternates with
41.X ERROR
To continue press OK

49.XXXX ERROR
To continue turn off then on

A critical firmware error has occurred that
caused the processor on the formatter to
cease operation. This error can be caused by
invalid print commands, corrupt data, or
invalid operations. Sometimes electrical
“noise” in the cable can corrupt data during
transmission to the product. Other causes
can be poor-quality cables, poor connections,
or home-grown programs. On rare
occasions, the formatter is at fault.

10. Replace an EIO device if you determine
that it causes the error.

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting 201

Table 3-7 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

50.X FUSER ERROR

A fuser error has occurred. The values for X
are listed below.

1.

Power cycle the product to determine if
the error is persistent.

●

50.1: Low fuser temperature of
thermistor (TH1)

2.

Verify that the correct fuser model is
installed in the product.

●

50.2: Fuser warm-up service

3.

●

Verify that the correct voltage fuser is
installed in the product.

50.3: High fuser temperature of
thermistor (TH1)

4.

50.2 errors: Make sure that the
connectors J8002 and J1505 are fully
seated on the ECU, and connector J18
is fully seated on the fuser.

5.

50.1, 50.3, 50.8, and 50.9 errors: Make
sure that the connectors J18 and J1608
are fully seated on the ECU.

6.

50.8 errors: Remove the fuser and
make sure that there is no residual
media or toner has built up on the fuser.

7.

50.4 errors: Make sure that the power
to the product meets the specifications
for the product.

For help press

●

50.4: Faulty fuser (drive circuit failure)

●

50.8: Lower fuser temperature of
thermistor (TH2)

●

50.9: High fuser temperature of
thermistor (TH2)

NOTE: If the power supplied to the
product is outside the specifications, the
fuser temperature control circuit will not
properly work, causing a fuser
malfunction.
Make sure that the connector J1002 and
J1505 are fully seated on the ECU.
If the error persists, replace the ECU.

51.XY ERROR

A laser/scanner error has occurred.

8.

If the error persists, replace the fuser.

1.

From the DIAGNOSTICS menu, run the
laser/scanner motor component test.
Verify that you can hear the motor
rotate.

2.

If you cannot hear the motor rotate,
verify that connector J1702 and
connector J1505 are fully seated on the
DC controller PCA (ECU).

3.

Verify that the connector J100 on the
laser/scanner assembly is securely
attached.

4.

If the error persists, replace the laser/
scanner assembly.

To continue turn off then on

202 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Table 3-7 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

52.XY ERROR

A laser/scanner error has occurred.

1.

For help press

X = 0, Y = 0: scanner error

alternates with

X = 2, Y = 0: scanner rotation error

From the DIAGNOSTICS menu, run the
laser/scanner motor component test.
Verify that you can hear the motor
rotate.

2.

If you cannot hear the motor rotate,
verify that connector J1702 and J1505
are fully seated on the DC controller
PCA (ECU).

3.

Verify that the connector J12 on the
laser/scanner assembly is securely
attached.

4.

If the error persists, replace the laser/
scanner assembly.

52.XY ERROR
To continue turn off then on

53.X0.01 ERROR

The product does not support the DIMM.

Replace the DIMM with one that the product
supports.

A temporary printing error occurred.

1.

Turn the product off and then on.

2.

Remove any third-party memory or USB
device, and then turn the product off and
then on.

55.XX.YY DC CONTROLLER ERROR

3.

Remove and then reinstall the formatter.

To continue turn off then on

4.

If the error persists, remove the
formatter and perform an engine test
(see Engine-test button on page 134). If
the engine test page fails to print,
replace the DC controller (part of the
ECU). If the engine test page prints,
replace the formatter.

UNSUPPORTED DIMM
55.XX.YY DC CONTROLLER ERROR
For help press
alternates with

56.X ERROR

The input device is unknown.

1.

Turn the product off and then on.

For help press

56.1 = unknown input device

2.

Reinstall all the input devices.

3.

Remove all non-HP paper handling
devices.

alternates with
56.X ERROR
To continue turn off then on
57.XX ERROR
For help press

A temporary printing error occurred in one of 1.
the two product fans (main fan FM1 or sub fan
2.
FM2).

alternates with

57.03: sub fan FM2 error

57.XX ERROR

57.04: main fan FM1 error

Verify that the main fan connection at
connector J1606 on the DC controller
PCA (ECU) is firmly seated.

3.

Verify that the sub fan connection at
connector J1505 on the DC controller
PCA (ECU) is firmly seated.

4.

Turn the printer on and verify each fan
is spinning.

5.

Replace the main fan or the sub fan if
they are not operational.

To continue turn off then on

ENWW

Turn the product off and then on.

Tools for troubleshooting 203

Table 3-7 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

58.XX ERROR

A product error has occurred where a
memory tag CPU error was detected, or there
is a problem with the air sensor or power
supply.

Make sure the line voltage and current source
meet the electrical specifications for the
product.

For help press
alternates with
58.XX ERROR
To continue turn off then on

To resolve problems with the power supply:
●

58.02 = check environmental sensor
TH3

●

58.04 = check low-voltage power supply
(ECU)

1.

Remove the product from any UPS
supplies, additional power supplies, or
power strips. Plug the product into a wall
outlet and see if this resolves the
problem.

2.

If the product is already plugged into a
wall outlet, try another power source in
the building that is independent of the
one being used.

3.

Replace the ECU.

59.XY ERROR

A temporary printing error occurred.

59.30 and 59.40 errors

For help press

●

59.30 = fuser motor start up error
(M8002)

1.

Turn the product off and then on.

2.
●

59.40 = fuser motor rotation error
(M8002)

Make sure that connectors J8002 and
J1504 are fully seated on the ECU.

3.
●

59.50 = main motor start up error
(M8001)

●

Use the COMPONENT TEST (in the
DIAGNOSTICS menu) to test the fuser
motor functionality. If necessary,
replace the motor (M8002).

59.60 = main motor rotation error
(M8001)

alternates with
59.XY ERROR
To continue turn off then on

68.X PERMANENT STORAGE FULL

59.50 and 59.60 errors
1.

Make sure that connector J1503 is fully
seated on the ECU.

2.

Use the COMPONENT TEST (in the
DIAGNOSTICS menu) to test the main
motor functionality. If necessary,
replace the motor (M8001).

The permanent storage is full. Some settings 1.
might have been reset to the factory defaults.

If the error does not clear, turn the
product off and then on.

For help press
2.

Print a configuration page and check the
product settings to determine which
values have changed.

3.

To clean up permanent storage, turn the
product off, and then press and hold the
Menu button
while turning the
product on.

4.

If the message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.

alternates with
68.X PERMANENT STORAGE FULL
To continue press OK

68.X PERMANENT STORAGE WRITE FAIL The storage device is failing to write. Printing
can continue, but there might be some
To continue press OK
unexpected behaviors because an error
occurred in permanent storage.

204 Chapter 3 Solve problems

Press the OK button to continue.
If the error does not clear, turn the product off
and then on.

ENWW

Table 3-7 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

68.X STORAGE ERROR SETTINGS
CHANGED

An error occurred in the product permanent
storage and one or more product settings has
been reset to its factory default.

Press the OK button to resume printing.

For help press

Print a configuration page, a menu map, and
check the product settings to determine
which values have changed.

alternates with
If the error does not clear, turn the product off
and then on.

68.X STORAGE ERROR SETTINGS
CHANGED
To continue press OK
69.X ERROR

Duplexer mechanism has failed.

Turn the product off and then on.

79.XXXX ERROR

The product detected a critical hardware
error.

1.

Press the stop button
to clear the
print job from the product memory. Turn
the product off and then on.

2.

Try printing a job from a different
program. If the job prints, go back to the
first program and try printing a different
file. If the message displays only with a
certain program or print job, contact the
software vendor for assistance.

To continue turn off then on

If the message persists with different
programs and print jobs, try these steps.
1.

Turn the product off.

2.

Disconnect all cables to the product that
connect it to the network or computer.

3.

Remove all the memory DIMMs or thirdparty DIMMs from the product. Then
reinstall the memory DIMM.

4.

Remove the EIO device from the
product.

5.

Turn the product on.

If the error no longer exists, follow these
steps.

ENWW

1.

Install the DIMM and EIO device one at
a time, making sure to turn the product
off and then on as you install each
device.

2.

Replace the DIMM or EIO device that
you determine caused the error.

3.

Reconnect all cables that connect the
product to the network or computer.

Tools for troubleshooting 205

Table 3-7 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

8X.YYYY EIO ERROR

The EIO accessory card in slot [X] has
encountered a critical error.

1.

Turn the product off and then on.

2.

Turn the product off, reseat the EIO
accessory in slot [X], and then turn the
product on.

3.

Turn the product off, remove the EIO
accessory from slot [X], install it in a
different EIO slot, and then turn the
product on.

4.

Replace the EIO accessory in slot [X].

8X.YYYY EMBEDDED JETDIRECT ERROR

The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has
encountered a critical error.

Turn the product off and then on.

 FULL

This message appears on the control-panel
display, but the bin is not full.

1.

Make sure that the media full sensor flag
is not damaged and can freely move. If
the sensor flag is damaged, replace the
top-cover assembly.

2.

Make sure that the connector J4 on is
fully seated on the sensor and
connector J1605 is fully seated on the
ECU.

3.

Use the G FD tray full sensor test in the
MANUAL SENSOR TEST menu (in the
DIAGNOSTICS menu) to test the
sensor functionality. If necessary,
replace the sensor (PS1).

ACCEPT BAD SIGNATURE?
Yes press OK
alternates with

The product is performing a remote firmware Download the correct firmware upgrade file
upgrade, the first-time code signing does not for this product, and then reinstall the
match the signature, and the SIGNATURE
upgrade.
CHECK menu is set to the PROMPT IF
BAD option.

ACCEPT BAD SIGNATURE?
No press
Access denied MENUS LOCKED

The product control-panel function you are
trying to use has been locked to prevent
unauthorized access.

See your system administrator.

Action not currently available for tray x

Duplexing is not available when the tray size
is set to the ANY SIZE setting or the ANY
CUSTOM setting.

Change tray settings.

Tray size cannot be ANY SIZE/ANY
CUSTOM

BAD OPTIONAL TRAY CONNECTION

206 Chapter 3 Solve problems

An optional tray is not connected correctly.

1.

Press the Menu button

2.

Press the down arrow button or the
up arrow button to navigate to the
PAPER HANDLING menu, and then
press the OK button.

3.

Press the down arrow button to
highlight the specified tray, and then
press the OK button.

4.

Change the selected tray's size and type
settings.

.

Remove the product from the tray, and
reinstall it. Turn the product off and then on.

ENWW

Table 3-7 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

Bad signature

The firmware upgrade code does not match
the product signature.

Download the correct firmware upgrade file
for this product, and then reinstall the
upgrade.

Upgrade cancelled
BLACK CARTRIDGE VERY LOW

The product indicates when a supply level is If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace
very low. Actual print cartridge life might vary. the print cartridge.
Consider having a replacement print
cartridge available to install when print quality
is no longer acceptable. You do not need to
replace the print cartridge at this time unless
print quality is no longer acceptable. After an
HP supply has reached the very low
threshold, the HP premium protection
warranty for that supply has ended.

Canceling...

The product is canceling a job. The message No action is necessary.
continues while the product clears the paper
path and clears any remaining incoming data.

CANNOT DUPLEX

The rear door must be closed to duplex.

Close the rear door.

Checking paper path

The product is checking for possible jams or
paper that was not cleared from the product.

No action is necessary.

Checking printer

The product is checking for possible jams or
paper that was not cleared from the product.

No action is necessary.

CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT
AVAILABLE

The product received a request for a
personality (product language) that does not
exist. The print job is canceled.

Print the job using a printer driver for a
different product language, or add the
requested language to the product (if
available).

CLOSE REAR DOOR
For help press

To continue press OK

To see a list of available personalities, print a
configuration page.
CLEANING DISK % COMPLETE
Do not power off
alternates with

The storage device is being sanitized or
cleaned. Do not turn off. Product functions
are unavailable. The product automatically
turns off and then on when finished.

No action is necessary.

CLEANING DISK % COMPLETE
For help press
CLEANING PAGE ERROR

You are processing a cleaning page with the Open the rear output bin to begin creating or
rear door closed.
processing the cleaning page.

Open rear door
CLEANING...

The product is performing an automatic
cleaning.

No action is necessary.

Clearing event log

The product is clearing the event log.

No action is necessary.

Clearing paper path

The product jammed or was turned on and
paper was detected in a wrong location. The
product is automatically attempting to eject
the pages.

Wait for the product to finish trying to clear the
pages. If it cannot, a jam message displays
on the control panel.

DO NOT GRAB PAPER

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting 207

Table 3-7 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

CLOSE REAR DOOR

This message appears on the control-panel
display, but the rear door is closed.

1.

Make sure that the connectors J8001
and J1505 are fully seated on the ECU.

2.

Use the J Rear cover open sensor test
in the MANUAL SENSOR TEST menu
(in the DIAGNOSTICS menu), to check
the rear door sensor functionality. If
necessary, replace the sensor
(PS8001).

1.

Make sure that connectors FT1 and FT2
are fully seated on the cartridge door
switch SW501.

2.

Make sure that the tab on the cartridge
door that activates the switch is not
missing or damaged. Replace the
cartridge-door assembly if necessary.

3.

Replace the door switch (SW501).

CLOSE TOP COVER

CODE CRC ERROR

This message appears on the control-panel
display, but the cartridge door is closed.

An error occurred during a firmware upgrade.

Resend the firmware upgrade.

The product is waiting for the print command.

Press the OK button to continue.

The current date and time.

Set the date and time or press the stop button
to skip.

Deleting...

Product is deleting a stored job.

No action is necessary.

DUPLEX OPERATION FAILED

A timing error has occurred during a duplex
printing job.

Press the OK button to continue printing. If
the error occurs again, cancel the job and
print it as a single-sided job.

The EIO disk in slot X is not working correctly.

1.

Turn the product off.

2.

Make sure the EIO disk is inserted
correctly and securely fastened.

3.

If the control panel message continues
to appear, replace the disk.

SEND RFU UPGRADE ON USB DEV PORT
DATA RECEIVED
To print last page press OK
alternates with

DATE/TIME = YYYY/MMM/DD HH:MM
To change press OK
To skip press

To continue press OK
alternates with
DUPLEX OPERATION FAILED
For help press
EIO  DISK NOT FUNCTIONAL
For help press

EIO  DISK SPINNING UP

The disk accessory in EIO slot [X] is
initializing.

No action is necessary.

alternates with


208 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Table 3-7 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

EIO DEVICE FAILURE

The specified device has failed.

Press the OK button to continue.

A command attempted an illogical operation.

Press the OK button to continue.

To clear press OK
EIO FILE OPERATION FAILED
To clear press OK
EIO FILE SYSTEM IS FULL

The specified file system is full and cannot be Press the OK button to continue.
written to.

To clear press OK
EIO IS WRITE PROTECTED

The file system cannot be written to.

Press the OK button to continue.

Event log empty

You are attempting to view an empty event
log by selecting the SHOW EVENT LOG
option from the control panel.

No action is necessary.

INCOMPATIBLE BLACK CARTRIDGE

The print cartridge is for another product.

Replace the print cartridge with a print
cartridge for this product.

Incorrect

The wrong PIN number was entered.

Reenter PIN number.

INFLATE FAILURE

An error occurred during a firmware upgrade.

Resend the firmware upgrade.

Initializing

Individual tasks are being initialized.

No action is necessary.

INSERT OR CLOSE TRAY 

The specified tray is open or missing.

Insert or close the tray for printing to continue.

The print cartridge is missing.

1.

Open the cartridge door.

2.

Install the cartridge.

3.

Close the cartridge door.

To clear press OK

SEND RFU UPGRADE ON USB DEV PORT

For help press
INSTALL BLACK CARTRIDGE
For help press

INSUFFICIENT MEMORY TO LOAD
FONTS/DATA
For help press

The product received more data than can fit Press the OK button to print the transferred
in its available memory. You might have tried data (some data might be lost).
to transfer too many macros, soft fonts, or
Simplify the print job or install additional
complex graphics.
memory.

alternates with

To continue press OK
LOAD TRAY 1 [TYPE] [SIZE]
To continue press OK
alternates with
LOAD TRAY 1 [TYPE] [SIZE]
For help press

ENWW

Tray 1 is empty.

Load Tray 1 with the requested paper.
If the paper is already in the Tray 1, press the
help button , and then press the OK button
to print.
To use another tray, remove paper from
Tray 1, and then press the OK button to
continue.

Tools for troubleshooting 209

Table 3-7 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

LOAD TRAY 1 [TYPE] [SIZE]

Tray 1 is empty and other trays are available.

Press the OK button to use another tray.

To use another tray press OK

To use Tray 1, load it with the requested
paper.

alternates with
If the paper is already in the Tray 1, press the
help button , and then press the OK button
to print.

LOAD TRAY 1 [TYPE] [SIZE]
For help press

To use another tray, remove paper from
Tray 1, and then press the OK button to use
another tray.
LOAD TRAY  [TYPE] [SIZE]
For help press

LOAD TRAY  [TYPE] [SIZE]
To use another tray press OK

The indicated tray is configured for a specific Load the requested paper in the tray.
type and size of paper required by a print job,
but the tray is empty. All other trays are also
empty.
A job is sent that requires a specific type and
size that is not available in the tray that is
indicated.

Press the OK button to use a type and size
that are available in another tray.

The product is waiting for you to load paper
in Tray 1.

If paper is already in the Tray 1, press the help
button , and then press the OK button to
print.

alternates with
LOAD TRAY  [TYPE] [SIZE]
For help press
MANUALLY FEED  

To use another tray, remove paper from
Tray 1, and then press the OK button.
MANUALLY FEED  

The product is waiting for you to load paper
in Tray 1.

Load the requested paper into Tray 1 and
press the OK button.

The product is waiting for you to load paper
in Tray 1.

Press the OK button to use a type and size
that are available in another tray.

The first side of a manual duplex job has been
printed and the product is waiting for you to
insert the output stack to complete the
second side.

1.

Load the output stack into Tray 1,
maintaining the same orientation with
printed side down.

2.

To continue printing, press the OK
button.

To continue press OK
alternates with
MANUALLY FEED  
For help press
MANUALLY FEED  
To use another tray press OK
alternates with
MANUALLY FEED  
For help press
MANUALLY FEED OUTPUT STACK
Then press OK to print second sides

MEM TEST FAILURE REPLACE DIMM  The product has detected an error with the
DIMM.

210 Chapter 3 Solve problems

Replace the DIMM.

ENWW

Table 3-7 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

No job to cancel

The stop button
was pressed, but there is No action is necessary.
no active job or buffered data to cancel.
The message is displayed for about
2 seconds before the product returns to the
ready state.

Non-HP supply installed

You have installed a print cartridge that
Hewlett-Packard did not make.

If you believe you purchased a genuine HP
supply, go to www.hp.com/go/
anticounterfeit.

OUTPUT BIN FULL

This message appears on the control-panel
display, but the bin is not full.

1.

Make sure that the media full sensor flag
is not damaged and can freely move. If
the sensor flag is damaged, replace the
top-cover assembly.

2.

Make sure that the connector J4 on is
fully seated on the sensor and
connector J1605 is fully seated on the
ECU.

3.

Use the G FD tray full sensor test in the
MANUAL SENSOR TEST menu (in the
DIAGNOSTICS menu) to test the
sensor functionality. If necessary,
replace the sensor (PS1).

Remove all paper from bin

OUTPUT BIN FULL

The output bin is full, but it is not needed for
the current print job.

Empty the bin before sending a job to that bin.

Paper is wrapped around the fuser, and the
product has jammed.

Remove the jam.

Remove all paper from bin
alternates with

Paper Wrapped Around Fuser
For help press

If the message persists after you have
cleared all jams, replace the fuser.

Please wait

The product is going offline.

No action is necessary.

Processing Upgrade 
 %

Firmware is being upgraded in several
stages.

No action is necessary.

The specified device has failed.

Press the OK button to continue.

A command attempted an illogical operation.

Press the OK button to continue.

Do not power off
RAM DISK DEVICE FAILURE
To clear press OK
RAM DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED
To clear press OK
RAM DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL

The specified file system is full and cannot be Press the OK button to continue.
written to.

To clear press OK
RAM DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED

The device cannot be written to.

Press the OK button to continue.

The product is reading the files in the USB
folder.

No action is necessary.

To clear press OK
READING  XXXX files
found XXXX supported

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting 211

Table 3-7 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

Request accepted please wait

The request to print an internal page is
waiting to print.

Wait for the current job to finish printing.

Restoring factory settings

Factory settings are being restored.

No action is necessary.

Restoring...

The specific settings are being restored.

No action is necessary.

RFU LOAD ERROR

An error occurred during a firmware upgrade.

Resend the firmware upgrade.

The specified device has failed.

Press the OK button to continue.

A command attempted an illogical operation.

Press the OK button to continue.

The specified file system is full and cannot be
written to.

Press the OK button to continue.

The device cannot be written to.

Press the OK button to continue.

A hard disk is being sanitized.

No action is necessary.

The tray indicated is loaded with a different
size of paper than the size configured for the
tray.

Load the tray with the size configured for the
tray.

SEND RFU UPGRADE ON USB DEV PORT
ROM DISK DEVICE FAILURE
To clear press OK
ROM DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED
To clear press OK
ROM DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL
To clear press OK
ROM DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED
To clear press OK
SANITIZING DISK % COMPLETE
Do not power off
alternates with
SANITIZING DISK % COMPLETE
For help press
SIZE MISMATCH IN TRAY X
For help press

Make sure that the guides are positioned
correctly in the specified tray. Printing can
continue from other trays.

alternates with


1.

Make sure that connectors J513, J507,
and J501 are fully seated on the highvoltage power supply.

2.

Make sure that connector J601 is fully
seated on the ECU.

3.

If the error persists, replace the highvoltage power supply.

4.

If the error persists, replace the ECU.

Sleep mode on

The product is in Sleep mode.

No action is necessary.

SUPPLY MEMORY WARNING

The product cannot read the memory in the
print cartridge.

If you believe you purchased a genuine HP
supply, go to www.hp.com/go/
anticounterfeit.

Economode disabled

212 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Table 3-7 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

Too many trays installed

You have installed more optional trays than
the product supports.

Remove one of the optional trays.

Turn power off and uninstall a tray
The product can accept up to two optional
500-sheet trays.
Too many USB accessories
For help press
Too many USB hubs

The does not support this many USB storage Remove the extra USB storage accessories
accessories.
until this message goes away. Then, remove
and reinsert the new USB storage accessory.
The product has detected that a USB hub is
connected to another USB hub.

Remove the extra USB hub. The product
does not support USB hubs connected to
other USB hubs.

This message states the current type and
size configuration of the paper tray, and
allows you to change the configuration.

To change the paper size or type press the
OK button while the message is present. To
clear the message, press the back arrow
while the message is present.

Remove latest USB hub
TRAY  [TYPE] [SIZE]
To change size or type press OK
alternates with
TRAY  [TYPE] [SIZE]

●

Select the ANY SIZE and ANY TYPE
settings if the tray is used frequently for
different sizes or types.

●

Set size and type to a specific setting if
printing with only one type of paper.

To accept settings press

TRAY  OPEN
For help press

The tray cannot feed paper to the product
Check the trays and close any that are open.
because tray [X] is open and must be closed
for printing to continue.

alternates with

Unable to add more files to print

The print queue has the maximum number of Wait for a job to finish before adding another
jobs.
job to the print queue.

Wait for a job to finish printing
UNABLE TO READ ENTIRE DIRECTORY

The list of files on the USB accessory is
longer than the product can display.

1.

To print a file from the partial list, press
the OK button and then select a file from
the list.

2.

To prevent this problem, remove files
from the USB accessory.

To continue press OK

UNABLE TO STORE JOB

The print job named cannot be stored
because of a memory, disk, or configuration
problem.

Correct the error and then try again to store
the job.

UNSUPPORTED SUPPLY IN USE

The print cartridge is for a different HP
product.

If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace
the print cartridge.

UNSUPPORTED SUPPLY INSTALLED

The print cartridge is for a different HP
product.

If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace
the print cartridge.

alternates with


ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting 213

Table 3-7 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

USB ACCESSORY NEEDS TOO MUCH
POWER

The USB accessory is drawing too much
electrical current. Printing cannot continue.

Remove the USB accessory, and then restart
the product.

Remove USB accessory and then turn off
then on

Use a USB accessory that uses less power
or that contains its own power supply.

alternates with
USB ACCESSORY NEEDS TOO MUCH
POWER
For help press
USB accessory not recognized
For help press
alternates with

The product does not support plug and Play
operation for the type of USB accessory in the
host USB port, or the accessory is not
supported

NOTE: Secure USB drives are not
supported for walk-up print with this product.
Secure USB drives usually start specialized
programs that require a password, and these
programs can not open on this product.

USB accessory not recognized
To clear press OK
USB printing unavailable

With the USB accessory connected, turn the
product off and then on. If the message
reappears, remove the USB accessory.

The administrator has disabled printing from
USB accessories.

Print the job from a computer that is
connected to the product.

For help press
USB storage accessory removed
Clearing any unassociated data

You have removed the USB accessory from To print the remaining jobs, reinsert the USB
the product. The product cancels any jobs
accessory and select the jobs again.
from the accessory that are in the print queue.

USB STORAGE DEVICE FAILURE

The specified device has failed.

Press the OK button to continue.

A command attempted an illogical operation.

Press the OK button to continue.

The product did not detect the type and size
of paper requested. The message shows the
most likely type and size available and the
tray in which they are available.

Press the OK button to accept the values in
the message, or press the up or down arrow
/ buttons to scroll through the available
choices.

To clear press OK
USB STORAGE FILE OPERATION FAILED
To clear press OK
USE TRAY  [TYPE] [SIZE]
To change press

/ .

To use press OK
USED SUPPLY IN USE
Economode disabled
USED SUPPLY INSTALLED

The print cartridge has been previously used. If you believe you purchased a genuine HP
supply, go to www.hp.com/go/
anticounterfeit.
The print cartridge has been previously used. Press the OK button to use this cartridge, or
install a new cartridge.
If you believe you purchased a genuine HP
supply, go to www.hp.com/go/
anticounterfeit.

214 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Table 3-7 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

Wait for printer to reinitialize

This message can appear for a variety of
reasons:

No action is necessary.

WARMING UP

●

The RAM DISK settings changed before
the product restarted.

●

The product is restarting after changing
external product modes.

●

You have exited the DIAGNOSTICS
menu.

●

A new formatter has been installed with
an old product, or a new product has
been installed with an old formatter.

The product is coming out of sleep mode.
Printing continues when it is done.

No action is necessary.

alternates with


Event-log messages
Print an event log
1.

Press the Menu button

.

2.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
and then press the OK button.

button to navigate to the DIAGNOSTICS menu,

3.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
menu, and then press the OK button to print.

button to navigate to the PRINT EVENT LOG

Show an event log

ENWW

1.

Press the Menu button

.

2.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
and then press the OK button.

3.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow button to navigate to the SHOW EVENT LOG
sub menu, and then press the OK button to print.

button to navigate to the DIAGNOSTICS menu,

Tools for troubleshooting 215

Sample event-log page
Figure 3-32 Sample event-log page
HP LaserJet P 3015 Printers

Event Log Page

1

Clear an event log
1.

Press the Menu button

.

2.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
then press the OK button.

3.

Type the product service PIN, and then press the OK button.

button to navigate to the SERVICE menu, and

NOTE: For the HP LaserJet P3015 base model, use the arrow buttons to type the product service
PIN.
4.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
sub menu, and then press the OK button.

216 Chapter 3 Solve problems

button to navigate to the CLEAR EVENT LOG

ENWW

Event-log messages
NOTE: Unless otherwise noted, the event log messages in the following table do not have a
corresponding control-panel message.
Table 3-8 Event log only messages
Event log message

Description

Comments

10.10.0Y

Memory error on supply

The memory tag is missing or defective.
See 10.XX.YY SUPPLY MEMORY
ERROR in Interpret control-panel
messages on page 197.

10.30.00

Non-HP supply in use

Transition from all HP to at least one nonHP consumable.

10.31.00

Non-HP supply in use

Transition to at least one cloned print
cartridge.

10.32.00

Unauthorized supply in use

Transition to at least one unauthorized
cloned print cartridge.

10.40.00

Genuine HP Supplies Installed

Transition from at least one non-HP to all
genuine HP supplies.

10.41.00

Unsupported supply in use

Transition at least one unsupported HP
consumable in use.

13.05.00

Jam in the fuser area

●

For jam location information, see
Jam locations on page 220.

●

If the error persists, a sensor might
be damaged. See Paper-path test
(and automatic sensors test)
on page 136 or Sensor test
(interactive) on page 137.

●

For jam location information, see
Jam locations on page 220.

●

If the error persists, a sensor might
be damaged. See Paper-path test
(and automatic sensors test)
on page 136 or Sensor test
(interactive) on page 137.

●

For jam location information, see
Jam locations on page 220.

●

If the error persists, a sensor might
be damaged. See Paper-path test
(and automatic sensors test)
on page 136 or Sensor test
(interactive) on page 137.

●

For jam location information, see
Jam locations on page 220.

●

If the error persists, a sensor might
be damaged. See Paper-path test
(and automatic sensors test)
on page 136 or Sensor test
(interactive) on page 137.

13.31.00

13.20.00

13.21.00

ENWW

Jam in the fuser area

Jam inside the rear door

Jam inside the rear door

Tools for troubleshooting 217

Table 3-8 Event log only messages (continued)
Event log message

Description

Comments

13.02.00

Jam inside the top cover

●

For jam location information, see
Jam locations on page 220.

●

If the error persists, a sensor might
be damaged. See Paper-path test
(and automatic sensors test)
on page 136 or Sensor test
(interactive) on page 137.

●

For jam location information, see
Jam locations on page 220.

●

If the error persists, a sensor might
be damaged. See Paper-path test
(and automatic sensors test)
on page 136 or Sensor test
(interactive) on page 137.

1.

Make sure that the product is in an
environment that meets the
specifications in Environmental
specifications on page 309.

2.

Make sure that connector J1803 is
fulley seated on the ECU.

3.

If the error persists, replace the
environment sensor. See Main fan,
fan duct, and environmental sensor
on page 98.

13.98.00

Paper jam open input trays

14.X

Feed roller error

54.01

The humidity-environment sensor (TH3)
is abnormal.

55 901C

DCC restored

68 8X04

The permanent storage date does not
match the engine.

68 8X05

The permanent storage date does match
the engine.

73.00.00

Printer error

Power cycle the product.

8x7345

Disk clean successful

X denotes the slot number (0 is internal).

8x7346

Disk clean failed

A hard disk or compact flash disk
cleaning failed. Usually caused by a
hardware failure of the disk. X denotes
the slot number.

8x7347

Some of the sanitized disk did not
correctly verify.

88.00.XX

FailCode from engine self-test execution.

218 Chapter 3 Solve problems

DCC NVRAM was restored from the
formatter.

ENWW

Clear jams
Common causes of jams
Many jams are caused by using paper that does not meet HP specifications. For complete paper
specifications for all HP LaserJet products, see the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This
guide is available at www.hp.com/support/ljpaperguide.
The product is jammed.
Cause

Solution

The paper does not meet specifications.

Use only paper that meets HP specifications. See the product
user guide.

A component is installed incorrectly.

Verify that all components are correctly installed.

You are using paper that has already passed through a product
or copier.

Do not use paper that has been previously printed on or copied.

A tray is loaded incorrectly.

Remove any excess paper from the tray. Make sure that the
stack is below the maximum stack height mark in the tray. See
the product user guide.

The paper is skewed.

The tray guides are not adjusted correctly. Adjust them so they
hold the stack firmly in place without bending it.

The paper is binding or sticking together.

Remove the paper, flex it, rotate it 180°, or flip it over. Reload
the paper into the tray.
NOTE: Do not fan paper. Fanning can create static
electricity, which can cause paper to stick together.

ENWW

The paper is removed before it settles into the output bin.

Reset the product. Wait until the page completely settles in the
output bin before removing it.

During two-sided printing, you removed the paper before the
second side of the document was printed.

Reset the product and print the document again. Wait until the
page completely settles in the output bin before removing it.

The paper is in poor condition.

Replace the paper.

The internal rollers from the tray are not picking up the paper.

Remove the top sheet of paper. If the paper is too heavy, it
might not be picked from the tray.

The paper has rough or jagged edges.

Replace the paper.

The paper is perforated or embossed.

Perforated or embossed paper does not separate easily. Feed
single sheets from Tray 1.

Product supply items have reached the end of their useful life.

Check the product control panel for messages alerting you of
supplies status, or print a supplies status page (see the product
user guide) to verify the remaining life of the supplies.

Paper was not stored correctly.

Replace the paper in the trays. Paper should be stored in the
original packaging in a controlled environment.

Clear jams 219

Jam locations
Use this illustration to identify locations of jams. In addition, instructions appear on the control panel to
direct you to the location of jammed paper and how to clear it.
NOTE: Internal areas of the product that might need to be opened to clear jams have green handles
or green labels.
Figure 3-33 Jam locations

5

1
7

6
4

2

3

3

1

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) area
13.JJ.NT JAM IN TRAY 1
13.JJ.NT JAM IN TRAY 
13.JJ.NT PAPER JAM OPEN INPUT TRAYS
See Clear jams from Tray 1 on page 222.

220 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

2

Tray 2 area
13.JJ.NT JAM IN TRAY 2
13.JJ.NT JAM IN TRAY 
13.JJ.NT PAPER JAM OPEN INPUT TRAYS
See Clear jams from Tray 2 or an optional 500-sheet tray on page 223.

3

Optional 500-sheet input tray (Tray 3 or Tray 4) area
13.JJ.NT JAM IN TRAY 
13.JJ.NT PAPER JAM OPEN INPUT TRAYS
See Clear jams from Tray 2 or an optional 500-sheet tray on page 223.

4

Duplex feed area
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE DUPLEXER
See Clear jams from the duplexer on page 226.

5

Output-bin area
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE REAR DOOR
See Clear jams from the output areas on page 231.

6

Fuser area
13.JJ.NT JAM IN FUSER
See Clear jams from the output areas on page 231.

7

Registration and transfer area
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE TOP COVER
See Clear jams from inside the product on page 234.

ENWW

Clear jams 221

Clear jams from the input trays
Clear jams from Tray 1
TIP: To see an animation of this procedure go to this Web site: www.hp.com/go/ljp3010-tray1-jams.
1.

Slowly pull the jammed paper or other print media out of the product. If part of the paper has already
been pulled into the product, see Registration and transfer area on page 234.

2.

Press the OK button to clear the message.

OK

222 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Clear jams from Tray 2 or an optional 500-sheet tray
TIP: To see an animation of this procedure go to this Web site: www.hp.com/go/ljp3010-tray2-jams.
1.

Remove the tray from the product.

1

2.

ENWW

Remove any damaged paper from the tray, and then reinsert the tray.

Clear jams 223

3.

4.

Press the cartridge-door-release button, and open the cartridge door.

1

1

2

2

3

3

Remove the print cartridge.

2

3

5.

Remove any jammed paper.

224 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

6.

Reinsert the print cartridge.

1

2

3

7.

Close the cartridge door.

1

2

3

ENWW

Clear jams 225

Clear jams from the duplexer
TIP: To see an animation of this procedure go to this Web site: www.hp.com/go/ljp3010-jamsduplexer.
1.

Remove Tray 2 completely from the product.

1

2.

Push the green button to release the duplex pan.

1

3.

Remove any jammed paper.

226 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

4.

Close the duplex pan.

5.

Reinsert Tray 2.

1

2
2

2

6.

Open the rear door, and push down so it is fully opened to a 90° angle.
NOTE: The rear door has two positions. It opens to a 45° angle for the rear output bin and to a
90° angle for clearing jams.

ENWW

Clear jams 227

7.

Remove any jammed paper.

8.

Press the cartridge-door-release button, and open the cartridge door.

9.

1

1

2

2

3

3

Close the rear door.

228 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

10. Remove the print cartridge.

2

3

11. Remove any jammed paper.

12. Reinsert the print cartridge.

1

2

3

ENWW

Clear jams 229

13. Close the cartridge door.

1

2

3

230 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Clear jams from the output areas
Clear jams from the rear door and the fuser area
TIP: To see an animation of this procedure go to this Web site: www.hp.com/go/ljp3010-jams-rear.
1.

Open the rear door, and push down so it is fully opened to a 90° angle.
NOTE: The rear door has two positions. It opens to a 45° angle for the rear output bin and to a
90° angle for clearing jams.

2.

ENWW

Remove any jammed paper.

Clear jams 231

3.

Press the cartridge-door-release button, and open the cartridge door.

1

1

2

2

3

3

4.

Close the rear door.

5.

Remove the print cartridge.

2

3

232 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

6.

Remove any jammed paper.

7.

Reinsert the print cartridge.

1

2

3

8.

Close the cartridge door.

1

2

3

ENWW

Clear jams 233

Clear jams from inside the product
Registration and transfer area
TIP: To see an animation of this procedure go to this Web site: www.hp.com/go/ljp3010-jams-top.
1.

2.

Press the cartridge-door-release button, and open the cartridge door.

1

1

2

2

3

3

Remove the print cartridge.

2

3

234 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

3.

Remove any jammed paper.

4.

Reinsert the print cartridge.

1

2

3

5.

Close the cartridge door.

1

2

3

ENWW

Clear jams 235

Jam causes and solutions
Jams in the top cover and product cassette
Cause

Solution

The cassette separation pad is worn or deformed.

Replace the cassette separation pad. See Tray 2, Tray 3, or
Tray 4 separation pad on page 90.

The cassette pickup roller is worn or deformed.

Replace the cassette pickup roller. See Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray
4 pickup roller on page 88.

Poor contact of the cassette pickup solenoid drive connector.

Reconnect the connector (J1601) on the ECU.

The cassette pickup solenoid is defective.

Replace the cassette pickup solenoid. See Cassette pickup
(Tray 2) solenoid or Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup solenoid
on page 115.

The registration roller is dirty, worn or deformed.

Clean the registration roller if it is dirty.

The registration assembly is defective.

●

Check the spring of the registration shutter and place it in
correct position.

●

Replace the registration assembly if the registration
shutter is damaged or worn. See Registration assembly
on page 102.

●

Check the sensor lever and place it in correct position to
move smoothly and freely.

●

Replace the sensor if the sensor lever is damaged.

The TOP sensor (PS215) lever is defective.

Poor contact of the TOP sensor (PS215) connector.

Reconnect the connector (J507) on the high-voltage power
supply.

The TOP sensor (PS215) is defective.

Replace the sensor.

Jams in the input tray area (optional 500-sheet input tray)
Cause

Solution

The 500-sheet tray separation pad is worn or deformed.

Replace the 500-sheet tray separation pad. See Tray 2, Tray 3,
or Tray 4 separation pad on page 90.

The 500-sheet tray pickup roller is worn or deformed.

Replace the 500-sheet tray pickup roller. See Tray 2, Tray 3,
or Tray 4 pickup roller on page 88.

Poor contact of the 500-sheet tray pickup solenoid drive
connector.

Reconnect the connector (J407) on the 500-sheet tray
connector PCA.

The 500-sheet tray pickup solenoid is defective.

Replace the 500-sheet tray pickup solenoid.

Jams in input tray area (Tray 1; multipurpose tray)
Cause

Solution

The Tray 1 separation pad is worn or deformed.

Replace Tray 1. See Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) cover
on page 69.

The Tray 1 pickup roller is worn or deformed.

Replace the Tray 1 pickup roller. See Tray 1 (multipurpose
tray) pickup roller on page 86.

236 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Jams in input tray area (Tray 1; multipurpose tray)
Cause

Solution

Poor contact of the Tray 1 pickup solenoid drive connector.

Reconnect the connector (J1602) on the ECU.

The Tray 1 pickup solenoid is defective.

Replace the Tray 1 pickup solenoid. See Cassette pickup
(Tray 2) solenoid or Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup solenoid
on page 115.

Jams in the input tray areas
Cause

Solution

Multiple-feed of media.

Replace the pickup roller or separation pad if worn or
deformed. See Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup roller
on page 86, or Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 pickup roller
on page 88, or Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) separation pad
on page 87, or Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 separation pad
on page 90.

The registration roller is worn or deformed.

Replace the registration assembly if the registration roller is
damaged or worn. See Registration assembly on page 102.

The transfer roller is not installed correctly.

Reinstall the transfer roller. See Transfer roller on page 92.

The transfer roller is worn or deformed.

Replace the transfer roller. See Transfer roller on page 92.

Poor contact of the main motor connector.

Reconnect the connector (J1503) on the ECU.

The main motor is defective.

Replace the main motor.

Jam in the rear door and fuser area (delivery-delay jam)
Cause

Solution

Dirt or scratches on the fuser-inlet guide.

●

Clean the fuser-inlet guide if dirty or if there is a toner build
up on it.

●

Replace the fuser if it is scratched. See Fuser
on page 100.

●

Check the sensor lever and place it in correct position to
move smoothly and freely.

●

Replace the fuser if the sensor lever is damaged. See
Fuser on page 100.

●

Reconnect the connectors (J22 and J24) on the transit
(inline) connector.

●

Reconnect the connector (J1608) on the ECU.

The fuser delivery sensor (PS2) lever is defective.

Poor contact of the fuser delivery sensor connector.

The fuser delivery sensor (PS2) is defective.

ENWW

Replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 100.

Clear jams 237

Jam in the rear door and fuser area (delivery-stationary jam)
Cause

Solution

Multiple-feed of media.

Replace the pickup roller or separation pad if worn or
deformed. See Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup roller
on page 86, or Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 pickup roller
on page 88, or Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) separation pad
on page 87, or Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 separation pad
on page 90.

Dirt or scratches on the fuser delivery upper guide or the fuserdelivery lower guide.

●

Clean the fuser-delivery upper guide or fuser-delivery
lower guide if dirt or if there is a toner build up on it.

●

Replace the fuser if the guides are deformed or
scratched. See Fuser on page 100.

●

Clean the fuser delivery roller if it is dirty.

●

Replace the fuser if the fuser delivery roller is worn or
deformed. See Fuser on page 100.

The fuser delivery roller is dirty, worn or deformed.

Fuser delivery sensor (PS2) lever is defective.

Replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 100.

The face-down tray media-full sensor lever is defective.

●

Check the sensor lever and place it in correct position to
move smoothly and freely.

●

Replace the top cover if the sensor lever is damaged. See
Top cover on page 84.

The face-down delivery roller is worn or deformed.

Replace the face-down delivery roller.

The fuser film or the fuser roller is defective.

Replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 100.

Jams in the top cover, rear door, fuser, and duplex area (residual media jam)
Cause

Solution

Residual media in the product.

Check the media path and remove any residual media.

The TOP sensor (P215) lever is defective.

●

Check the sensor lever and place it in correct position to
move smoothly and freely.

●

Replace the product if the sensor lever is damaged.

Poor contact of the TOP sensor (PS215) connector.

Reconnect the connector (J507) on the high-voltage power
supply.

The TOP sensor (PS215) is defective.

Replace the sensor.

The media width sensor (PS225) lever is defective

●

Check the sensor lever and place it in correct position to
move smoothly and freely.

●

Replace the product if the sensor lever is damaged.

Poor contact of the media width sensor (PS225) connector.

Reconnect the connector (J513) on the high-voltage power
supply.

The media width sensor (PS225) is defective.

Replace the sensor.

The fuser delivery sensor (PS2) lever is defective

●

Check the sensor lever and place it in correct position to
move smoothly and freely.

●

Replace the fuser if the sensor lever is damaged. See
Fuser on page 100.

238 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Jams in the top cover, rear door, fuser, and duplex area (residual media jam)
Cause

Solution

Poor contact of the fuser delivery sensor connector.

●

Reconnect the connectors (J22 and J24) on the transit
(inline) connector.

●

Reconnect the connector (J1608) on the ECU.

The fuser delivery sensor (PS2) is defective.

Replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 100.

The duplex media-feed sensor (PS502) lever is defective
(duplex models).

●

Check the sensor lever and place it in correct position to
move smoothly and freely.

●

Replace the high-voltage power supply if the sensor lever
is damaged.

Poor contact of the duplex media-feed sensor (PS502)
connector (duplex models).

Reconnect the connector (J501) on the high-voltage power
supply.

The duplex media-feed sensor is defective (duplex models).

Replace the high-voltage power supply.

Jams in the rear door and fuser area (fuser wrapping jam)
Cause

Solution

The fuser film or the pressure roller is defective.

Replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 100.

Jams in the rear door, fuser, and duplex areas (duplex models; duplex re-pickup jam)

ENWW

Cause

Solution

The face-down delivery roller is worn or deformed.

Replace the delivery assembly.

The duplex media-feed sensor (PS502) lever is defective.

●

Check the sensor lever and place it in the correct position
to move smoothly and freely.

●

Replace the high-voltage power supply if the sensor lever
is damaged.

Poor contact of the duplex media-feed sensor (PS502)
connector.

Reconnect the connector (J501) on the high-voltage power
supply.

The duplex media-feed sensor is defective.

Replace the high-voltage power supply.

Clear jams 239

Avoid repeated jams
●

Verify that the input trays are not overfilled. The input tray capacities vary depending on the type
of print media that you are using.

●

Verify that the media guides are properly adjusted.

●

Do not add print media into the input trays while the product is printing.

●

Use only HP-recommended media types and sizes.

●

Do not fan media prior to loading it in a tray. To loosen the ream, hold it firmly in both hands and
twist the media by rotating your hands in the opposite direction.

●

Do not let print media stack up in the output bin. The print media type and the amount of toner used
affect the output bin capacity.

●

Check the power connection. Make sure that the power cord is firmly connected to both the product
and the power supply box. Plug the power cord into a grounded power outlet.

240 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Change jam recovery
This product provides a jam recovery feature that reprints jammed pages. The following options are
available:
●

AUTO — The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available. This
is the default setting.

●

OFF — The product does not attempt to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to
store the most recent pages, performance is optimal.
NOTE: When using this option, if the product runs out of paper and the job is being printed on
both sides, some pages can be lost.

●

ON — The product always reprints jammed pages. Additional memory is allocated to store the last
few pages printed. This might cause overall performance to suffer.

Set the jam recovery feature

ENWW

1.

Press the Menu button

2.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
DEVICE menu, and then press the OK button.

3.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
and then press the OK button.

button to navigate to the SYSTEM SETUP menu,

4.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
and then press the OK button.

button to navigate to the JAM RECOVERY menu,

5.

Press the down arrow or up arrow
the OK button.

6.

Press the Menu button

.
button to navigate to the CONFIGURE

/ buttons to highlight the appropriate setting, and then press

to return to the Ready state.

Clear jams 241

Solve paper-handling problems
Use only paper that meets the specifications outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media
Guide. Always configure the paper type on the control panel to match the type of paper that is loaded
in the tray.

Product feeds multiple sheets
Product feeds multiple sheets
Cause

Solution

The input tray is overfilled. Open the tray and verify that the
paper stack is below the maximum stack height mark.

Remove excess paper from the input tray.

Print paper is sticking together.

Remove paper, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or flip it over, and
then reload it into the tray.
NOTE: Do not fan paper. Fanning can cause static electricity,
which can cause paper to stick together.

Paper does not meet the specifications for this product.

Use only paper that meets HP paper specifications for this
product.

Trays are not properly adjusted.

Make sure that the paper guides match the size of paper being
used.

Product feeds incorrect page size
Product feeds incorrect page size
Cause

Solution

The correct size paper is not loaded in the input tray.

Load the correct size paper in the input tray.

The correct size paper is not selected in the software program
or printer driver.

Confirm that the settings in the software program and printer
driver are correct, because the software program settings
override the printer driver and control panel settings, and the
printer driver settings override the control panel settings. For
more information, see the product user guide.

The correct size paper for the tray is not selected in the product
control panel.

From the control panel, select the correct size paper for the
tray.

The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray.

Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine
the paper size for which the tray is configured.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper.

Verify that the paper guides are touching the paper.

242 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Product pulls from incorrect tray
Product pulls from incorrect tray
Cause

Solution

You are using a driver for a different product.

Use a driver for this product.

The specified tray is empty.

Load paper in the specified tray.

The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray.

Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine
the paper size for which the tray is configured.

Paper does not feed automatically
Paper does not feed automatically
Cause

Solution

Manual feed is selected in the software program.

Load Tray 1 with paper, or, if the paper is loaded, press the
OK button.

The correct size paper is not loaded.

Load the correct size paper.

The input tray is empty.

Load paper into the input tray.

Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed.

Open the product and remove any paper in the paper path.

The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray.

Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine
the paper size for which the tray is configured.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper.

Verify that the rear and width paper guides are touching the
paper.

The manual-feed prompt is set to ALWAYS. The product
always prompts for manual feed, even if the tray is loaded.

Open the tray, reload the media, and then close the tray.
Or, change the manual-feed prompt setting to UNLESS
LOADED, so that the product prompts for manual feed only
when the tray is empty.

The USE REQUESTED TRAY setting on the product is set to
EXCLUSIVELY, and the requested tray is empty. The product
will not use another tray.

ENWW

Load the requested tray.
Or, change the setting from EXCLUSIVELY to FIRST on the
CONFIGURE DEVICE menu. The product can use other trays
if no media is loaded in the specified tray.

Solve paper-handling problems 243

Paper does not feed from Tray 2, 3, or 4
Paper does not feed from Tray 2 or 3
Cause

Solution

The correct size paper is not loaded.

Load the correct size paper.

The input tray is empty.

Load paper in the input tray.

The correct paper type for the input tray is not selected in the
product control panel.

From the product control panel, select the correct paper type
for the input tray.

Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed.

Open the product and remove any paper in the paper path.
Closely inspect the fuser area for jams.

None of the optional trays appear as input tray options.

The optional trays only display as available if they are installed.
Verify that any optional trays are correctly installed. Verify that
the printer driver has been configured to recognize the optional
trays.

An optional tray is incorrectly installed.

Print a configuration page to confirm that the optional tray is
installed. If not, verify that the tray is correctly attached to the
product.

The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray.

Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine
the paper size for which the tray is configured.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper.

Verify that the guides are touching the paper.

Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed
Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed
Cause

Solution

The correct paper type is not specified in the software or printer
driver.

Verify that the correct paper type is selected in the software or
printer driver.

The input tray is overfilled.

Remove excess paper from the input tray. Do not exceed the
maximum stack height marks for the tray.

Paper in another input tray is the same size as the
transparencies, and the product is defaulting to the other tray.

Make sure that the input tray containing the transparencies or
glossy paper is selected in the software program or printer
driver. Use the product control panel to configure the tray to
the paper type loaded.

The tray containing the transparencies or glossy paper is not
configured correctly for type.

Make sure that the input tray containing the transparencies or
glossy paper is selected in the software program or printer
driver. Use the product control panel to configure the tray to
the paper type loaded.

Transparencies or glossy paper might not meet supported
paper specifications.

Use only paper that meets the HP paper specifications for this
product.

High-humidity environments may cause glossy paper not to
feed, or to feed too many sheets.

Avoid printing glossy paper in high humidity conditions. When
printing glossy paper, removing the paper from the wrapper
and letting it rest for a few hours can improve feeding into the
product. However, letting paper rest in humid environments
may also cause blisters.

244 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Envelopes jam or will not feed in the product
Envelopes jam or will not feed in the product
Cause

Solution

Envelopes are loaded in an unsupported tray. Only Tray 1 can
feed envelopes.

Load envelopes into Tray 1.

Envelopes are curled or damaged.

Try using different envelopes. Store envelopes in a controlled
environment.

Envelopes are sealing because the moisture content is too
high.

Try using different envelopes. Store envelopes in a controlled
environment.

Envelope orientation is incorrect.

Verify that the envelope is loaded correctly.

This product does not support the envelopes being used.

Refer to the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide.

Tray 1 is configured for a size other than envelopes.

Configure Tray 1 size for envelopes.

Output is curled or wrinkled
Output is curled or wrinkled

ENWW

Cause

Solution

Paper does not meet the specifications for this product.

Use only paper that meets the HP paper specifications for this
product.

Paper is damaged or in poor condition.

Remove paper from the input tray and load paper that is in
good condition.

Product is operating in an excessively humid environment.

Verify that the printing environment is within humidity
specifications.

You are printing large, solid-filled areas.

Large, solid-filled areas can cause excessive curl. Try using a
different pattern.

Paper used was not stored correctly and might have absorbed
moisture.

Remove paper and replace it with paper from a fresh,
unopened package.

Paper has poorly cut edges.

Remove paper, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or turn it over, and
then reload it into the input tray. Do not fan paper. If the problem
persists, replace the paper.

The specific paper type was not configured for the tray or
selected in the software.

Configure the software for the paper (see the software
documentation). Configure the tray for the paper, see the
product user guide.

The paper has previously been used for a print job.

Do not re-use paper.

Solve paper-handling problems 245

Product does not duplex or duplexes incorrectly (duplex models)
Product will not duplex (print 2-sided jobs) or duplexes incorrectly
Cause

Solution

The product does not support automatic 2–sided printing.

The HP LaserJet P3015 base model does not support
automatic 2–sided printing.

You are trying to duplex on unsupported paper.

Verify that the paper is supported for duplex printing.

The printer driver is not set up for duplex printing.

Set up the printer driver to enable duplex printing.

The first page is printing on the back of preprinted forms or
letterhead.

Load preprinted forms and letterhead in Tray 1 with the
letterhead or printed side down, with the top of the page leading
into the product. For Trays 2, 3, and 4, load the paper printed
side up with the top of the page toward the front of the product.

The product configuration is not set for duplexing.

In Windows, run the automatic configuration feature:

Duplex printing is turned off.

1.

Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click
Printers (for Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (for
Windows XP).

2.

Right-click the HP product icon, and then click
Properties or Printing Preferences.

3.

Click the Device Settings tab.

4.

Under Installable Options, click Update Now in the
Automatic Configuration list.

1.

Open each of the following menus. Press the down arrow
button to highlight it and then press the OK button to
select it.

2.

246 Chapter 3 Solve problems

a.

CONFIGURE DEVICE

b.

PRINTING

c.

DUPLEX

Select the ON option.

ENWW

Solve image-quality problems
Image defect examples
These examples identify the most common print-quality problems. If you still have problems after trying
the suggested solutions, contact HP Customer Support.
Table 3-9 Image defect examples
Problem
Blank page

Light print (partial page)

Light print (entire page)

ENWW

Image example

Solution
1.

The laser/scanner shutter on the print cartridge might be damaged. Replace
the print cartridge.

2.

The laser/scanner shutter on the laser/scanner might be damaged. Replace
the laser/scanner. See Laser/scanner on page 107.

3.

The laser/scanner might be damaged. Replace the laser/scanner. See Laser/
scanner on page 107.

4.

Poor developing bias with the cartridge contacts. Clean the contact on the print
cartridge.

5.

The high-voltage power supply might be damaged. Replace the high-voltage
power supply. See High-voltage power supply (HVPS) on page 121.

1.

Make sure that the print cartridge is fully installed.

2.

The print cartridge might be almost empty. Check the supplies status, and
replace the print cartridge if necessary.

3.

The paper might not meet HP specifications (for example, the paper is too
moist or too rough).

1.

Make sure that the print cartridge is fully installed.

2.

Make sure that the ECONOMODE setting is turned off at the control panel and
in the printer driver. For more information, see the product user guide.

3.

Open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the product control panel. Open the
PRINT QUALITY submenu and increase the TONER DENSITY setting. For
more information, see the product user guide.

4.

Try using a different type of paper.

5.

The print cartridge might be reaching its estimated end of life. Check the
supplies status, and replace the print cartridge if necessary.

Solve image-quality problems 247

Table 3-9 Image defect examples (continued)
Problem

Image example

Solution

Perform the following test
Stop a print job during the print operation before it is complete, then remove
the print cartridge. Open the photosensitive drum shield, and look at the toner
image on the drum.
◦

If the image is not fully transferring to the page, replace the transfer roller.
See Transfer roller on page 92. Go to step 6.

◦

If the toner on the drum is faint, replace the laser/scanner. See Laser/
scanner on page 107. Go to step 9.

6.

The transfer roller shaft might be dirty. Remove the transfer roller and clean
the shaft to ensure good contact. See Transfer roller on page 92.

7.

If the transfer roller is deformed or damaged, replace the roller. See Transfer
roller on page 92.

8.

The high-voltage power supply might be damaged. Replace the high-voltage
power supply. See High-voltage power supply (HVPS) on page 121.

9.

The laser/scanner might be damaged. Replace the laser/scanner. See Laser/
scanner on page 107.
If replacing the laser/scanner does not resolve the problem and the highvoltage power supply was not replaced (step 8), replace the high-voltage
power supply. See High-voltage power supply (HVPS) on page 121.

Specks (front or back of
the page is dirty)

248 Chapter 3 Solve problems

Specks might appear on a page after a jam has been cleared.
1.

The paper might be dirty. Use a new package of paper. make sure that the
paper is stored correctly. See your product user guide.

2.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

3.

Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser. See
Print Quality menu on page 180.

4.

Try using a different type of paper.

5.

Check the print cartridge for leaks. If the print cartridge is leaking, replace it.

6.

The cassette pickup roller might be dirty. Clean the roller. If it cannot be
cleaned, replace the roller. See Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 pickup roller
on page 88.

7.

Repetitive dirt marks can be caused by the registration roller, transfer roller or
pressure roller. Use the Repetitive image-defect ruler on page 173 to identify
the problem, and then replace the appropriate component.

8.

The media-feed guide, or the fuser-inlet guide might be dirty. Clean the guide.

9.

The delivery rollers might be dirty. Clean the rollers.

ENWW

Table 3-9 Image defect examples (continued)
Problem

Image example

Dropouts

Lines

Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc

Horizontal lines

ENWW

Aa Bb C c
Aa Bb C c
Aa Bb C c
Aa Bb C c
Aa Bb C c

Solution
1.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
See Environmental specifications on page 309.

2.

If the paper is rough, and the toner easily rubs off, open the CONFIGURE
DEVICE menu at the product control panel. Open the PRINT QUALITY
submenu, select FUSER MODES, and then select the paper type you are
using. Change the setting to HIGH1 or HIGH2, which helps the toner fuse more
completely onto the paper. For more information, see the product user guide.

3.

Try using a smoother paper.

4.

If the transfer roller is deformed or damaged, replace the roller. See Transfer
roller on page 92.

5.

The high-voltage contact of the static eliminator with the print cartridge might
be dirty. Clean the contact.

6.

The photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, or developing roller might
be damaged. Replace the print cartridge.

7.

The fuser film might be scratched or dirty. Replace the fuser. See Fuser
on page 100.

8.

The high-voltage power supply might be damaged. Replace the high-voltage
power supply. See High-voltage power supply (HVPS) on page 121.

1.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

2.

Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser. See
the Print Quality menu on page 180 for cleaning page information, and Clean
the product on page 254.

3.

The photosensitive drum might be scratched. Replace the print cartridge.

4.

The fuser-inlet guide might be dirty. Clean the guide.

5.

The fuser film might be scratched. Replace the fuser. See Fuser
on page 100.

1.

The photosensitive drum might be scratched. Replace the print cartridge.

2.

The fuser film might be dirty or damaged. Replace the fuser. See Fuser
on page 100.

Solve image-quality problems 249

Table 3-9 Image defect examples (continued)
Problem

Image example

Gray background (image
is obviously dark)

Solution
1.

Do not use paper that has already been run through the product.

2.

Try using a different type of paper.

3.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

4.

Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°.

5.

Open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the product control panel. On the
PRINT QUALITY submenu, increase the TONER DENSITY setting. For more
information, see the product user guide.

6.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
See the product user guide.

7.

The print cartridge might need to be replaced.

8.

The print-cartridge ground or bias contacts might be dirty. Clean the contacts.

9.

Stop a print job before it is complete, and then remove the print cartridge. Open
the photosensitive drum shield, and look at the toner image on the drum.
◦

If the image is not fully transferring to the page, replace the transfer roller.
See Transfer roller on page 92.

◦

If the toner on the drum is faint, replace the laser/scanner. See Laser/
scanner on page 107.

10. The high-voltage power supply might be damaged. Replace the high-voltage
power supply. See High-voltage power supply (HVPS) on page 121.
Toner smear

Loose toner

250 Chapter 3 Solve problems

1.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

2.

Try using a different type of paper.

3.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
See Environmental specifications on page 309.

4.

Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser. See
Print Quality menu on page 180.

5.

The print cartridge might need to be replaced.

Loose toner, in this context, is defined as toner that can be rubbed off the page.
1.

If paper is heavy or rough, open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the
product control panel. On the PRINT QUALITY submenu, select FUSER
MODES, and then select the paper type you are using. Change the setting to
HIGH1 or HIGH2, which helps the toner fuse more completely onto the paper.
You must also set the type of paper for the tray you are using. For more
information, see the product user guide.

2.

If you have observed a rougher texture on one side of your paper, try printing
on the smoother side.

3.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
See Environmental specifications on page 309.

4.

Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide.

5.

The pressure roller is dirty, the fuser film is scratched, or a foreign substance
is on the fuser film. Use the PRINT FUSER TEST PAGE option in the
DIAGNOSTICS menu to test the fuser. If the error persists, replace the fuser.
See Fuser on page 100.

ENWW

Table 3-9 Image defect examples (continued)
Problem

Image example

Repeat defects

Repeat image
Dear Mr. Abhjerhjk,
The dhjhfiuhu if teint hhkjhjnf j us a weue jd, fnk
ksneh vnk kjdfkaakd ss hsjhnckkajhdhf kashfhnduujdn.
Pkshkkhklhlkhkhyufwe4yrh9jjflkln djd skshkshdcnksnjcnal
aksnclnslskjlncsl nas lnslna, ncnsljsjscljckn nsnclknsllj
hwlsdknls nwljs nlnscl nijhsn clsncij hn. Iosi fsjs jlkh andjna this
is a hn. jns fir stie a djakjd ajjssk. Thsi ius vnvlu tyeh lch afted,
and when hghj hgjhk jdj a dt sonnleh.
Suolklv jsdj hvjkrt ten sutc of jthjkfjkn vjdj hwjd, an olk d
.at fhjdjht ajshef. Sewlfl nv atug ahgjfjknvr kdkjdh sj hvjk
sjskrplo book. Camegajd sand their djnln as orged tyehha
as as hf hv of the tinhgh in the cescmdal vlala tojk. Ho sn shj
shjkh a sjca kvkjn? No ahdkj ahhtuah ahavjnv hv vh aefve r
Tehreh ahkj vaknihidh was skjsaa a dhkjfn anj
cjkhapsldnlj llhfoihrfhthej ahjkkjna oa h j a kah w asj kskjnk as
sa fjkank cakajhjkn eanjsdn qa ejhc pjtpvjlnv4purlaxnwl. Ana
l, and the askeina of ahthvnasm. Sayhvjan tjhhjhr ajn ve fh k
v nja vkfkahjd a. Smakkljl a sehiah adheufh if you do klakc k
w vka ah call lthe cjakha aa d a sd fijs.

ENWW

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

2.

Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser. See
Print Quality menu on page 180.

3.

Use the repetitive defect ruler to determine if the defect is caused by the fuser
or the print cartridge (see Repetitive image-defect ruler on page 173).
◦

If the print cartridge is causing the defect, run the print/stop test at the
500 msec setting. If the test shows a defect, replace the print cartridge.
See Print cartridge on page 52.

◦

Use the PRINT FUSER TEST PAGE option in the DIAGNOSTICS menu
to test the fuser. If the error persists, replace the fuser. See Fuser
on page 100.

This type of defect might occur when using preprinted forms or a large quantity of
narrow paper. Verify that the preprinted ink used on forms meet HP specifications
for use in laser printers.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

2.

Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide.

3.

Verify that the product is configured for the correct paper type.

4.

Set the fuser mode to LOW.

5.

Use the PRINT FUSER TEST PAGE option in the DIAGNOSTICS menu to
test the fuser. If the error persists, replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 100.

AaBbCc
AaBbCc

1.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

2.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
See the product user guide.

AaBbCc
AaBbCc

3.

Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide.

4.

The laser/scanner wire connectors might have poor contact. Reconnect the
connectors (J12 and J3100).

5.

The ECU wire connectors might have poor contact. Reconnect the connectors
(J1505 and J1702).

6.

The laser/scanner might be damaged. Replace the laser/scanner. See Laser/
scanner on page 107.

1.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

2.

Verify that no torn pieces of paper are inside the product.

3.

Make sure that paper is loaded correctly and that all adjustments have been
made. Make sure that the guides in the tray are not too tight or too loose against
the paper.

4.

Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°.

5.

Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide.

6.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
See Environmental specifications on page 309.

AaBbCc
AaBbCc

Page skew

1.

1.

Sincerely,
Mr. Scmehnjcj

Misformed characters

Solution

Solve image-quality problems 251

Table 3-9 Image defect examples (continued)
Problem

Image example

Curl or wave

Wrinkles or creases

Vertical white lines

252 Chapter 3 Solve problems

Solution
1.

Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°.

2.

Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide.

3.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
See Environmental specifications on page 309.

4.

Try printing to a different output bin.

5.

If paper is lightweight and smooth, open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at
the product control panel. On the PRINT QUALITY submenu, select FUSER
MODES, and then select the paper type you are using. Change the setting to
LOW, which helps reduce the heat in the fusing process. You must also set
the type of paper for the tray you are using. For more information, see the
product user guide.

1.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

2.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
See Environmental specifications on page 309.

3.

Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°.

4.

Make sure that paper is loaded correctly and all adjustments have been made.
For more information, see the product user guide.

5.

Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. See the product user guide.

6.

If envelopes are creasing, try storing envelopes so that they lie flat.

7.

If paper is lightweight and smooth, open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at
the product control panel. On the PRINT QUALITY submenu, select FUSER
MODES, and then select the paper type you are using. Change the setting to
LOW, which helps reduce the heat in the fusing process. You must also set
the type of paper for the tray you are using. For more information, see the
product user guide.

1.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

2.

Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide.

3.

The photosensitive drum might be scratched, or the developing roller might be
damaged. Replace the print cartridge.

4.

The laser beam window might be dirty. Clean the laser beam window on the
laser/scanner.

5.

The fuser inlet guide might be dirty. Clean the guide. See Clean the product
on page 254.

6.

The fuser film might be scratched or dirty. Replace the fuser. See Fuser
on page 100.

7.

The laser/scanner might be damaged. Replace the laser/scanner. See Laser/
scanner on page 107.

ENWW

Table 3-9 Image defect examples (continued)
Problem

Image example

Horizontal white lines

Black page

Tire tracks

Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
White spots on black or in
the image

Scattered lines

ENWW

Solution
1.

The photosensitive drum might be scratched, or the developing roller might be
damaged. Replace the print cartridge.

2.

The fuser film might be damaged. Replace the fuser. See Fuser
on page 100.

1.

The print-cartridge ground or bias contacts might be dirty. Clean the contacts.

2.

The primary charging roller might be defective. Replace the print cartridge.

3.

The high-voltage power supply might be damaged. Replace the high-voltage
power supply. See High-voltage power supply (HVPS) on page 121.

This defect typically occurs when the print cartridge has far exceeded its estimated
life. For example, if you are printing a very large quantity of pages with very little
toner coverage.
1.

The print cartridge might need to be replaced.

2.

Reduce the number of pages that you print with very low toner coverage.

1.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

2.

Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide.

3.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
See the product user guide.

4.

The print cartridge might need to be replaced.

5.

If the transfer roller is deformed or damaged, replace the roller. See Transfer
roller on page 92.

6.

The transfer roller shaft might be dirty (poor contact). Remove the transfer
roller and clean the shaft. See Transfer roller on page 92.

7.

The high-voltage power supply might be damaged. Replace the high-voltage
power supply. See High-voltage power supply (HVPS) on page 121.

1.

Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide.

2.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
See Environmental specifications on page 309.

3.

Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°.

4.

Open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the product control panel. Open the
PRINT QUALITY submenu and change the TONER DENSITY setting. For
more information, see the product user guide.

5.

Open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the product control panel. On the
PRINT QUALITY submenu, open OPTIMIZE and set LINE DETAIL=ON. For
more information, see the product user guide.

Solve image-quality problems 253

Table 3-9 Image defect examples (continued)
Problem

Image example

Blurred print

Random image
repetition

Solution
1.

Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet
HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide.

2.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met.
See Environmental specifications on page 309.

3.

Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°.

4.

Do not use paper that already has been run through the product.

5.

Decrease the toner density. Open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the
product control panel. Open the PRINT QUALITY submenu and change the
TONER DENSITY setting. For more information, see the product user guide.

6.

Open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the product control panel. On the
PRINT QUALITY submenu, open OPTIMIZE and set HIGH
TRANSFER=ON. For more information, see the product user guide.

If an image that appears at the top of the page (in solid black) repeats further down
the page (in a gray field), the toner might not have been completely erased from the
last job. (The repeated image might be lighter or darker than the field it appears in.)
●

Change the tone (darkness) of the field that the repeated image appears in.

●

Change the order in which the images are printed. For example, have the
lighter image at the top of the page, and the darker image farther down the
page.

●

From your software program, rotate the whole page 180° to print the lighter
image first.

●

If the defect occurs later in a print job, turn the product off for 10 minutes, and
then turn it on to restart the print job.

Clean the product
WARNING! Do not attempt to clean the print-cartridge photosensitive drum or the product transfer
roller.
Clean the product (service visit)
Use the guidelines below to clean the product.
●

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup roller and separation pad
◦

●

Cassette (Tray 2) pickup roller and separation pad
◦

●

Wipe with a clean lint-free cloth

Wipe with a clean lint-free cloth

Paper feeder (Tray 3 and Tray 4) pickup roller and separation pad
◦

Wipe with a clean lint-free cloth

254 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

●

Registration roller
◦

●

Transfer guide
◦

●

Wipe with a soft, dry flannel cloth

Media-feed guide
◦

●

Wipe with a clean lint-free cloth

Wipe with a clean lint-free cloth

Fuser-inlet guide
◦

Wipe with a water dampened flannel cloth

Figure 3-34 Product cleaning diagram

Table 3-10 Product cleaning diagram
Item

Description

Item

Description

1

Fuser-inlet guide

7

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup roller

2

Media-feed guide

8

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) separation pad

3

Photosensitive drum (in the print cartridge)

9

Cassette (Tray 2) pickup roller

ENWW

Clean the product 255

Table 3-10 Product cleaning diagram (continued)
Item

Description

Item

Description

4

Transfer roller

10

Cassette (Tray 2) separation pad

5

Transfer guide

11

Paper feeder pickup roller (Tray 3 or Tray 4)

6

Registration roller

12

Paper feeder separation pad (Tray 3 or Tray 4)

256 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Solve performance problems
Problem

Cause

Solution

Pages print but are totally blank.

The document might contain blank
pages.

Check the document that you are printing
to see if content appears on all of the
pages.

The product might be malfunctioning.

To check the product, print a
Configuration page.

Heavier paper types can slow the print
job.

Print on a different type of paper.

Complex pages can print slowly.

Proper fusing may require a slower print
speed to ensure the best print quality.

The product might not be pulling paper
correctly.

Make sure paper is loaded in the tray
correctly.

The paper is jamming in the product.

Clear the jam. See Clear jams
on page 219.

The USB cable might be defective or
incorrectly connected.

●

Disconnect the USB cable at both
ends and reconnect it.

●

Try printing a job that has printed in
the past.

●

Try using a different USB cable.

Pages print very slowly.

Pages did not print.

Other devices are running on your
computer.

ENWW

The product might not share a USB port.
If you have an external hard drive or
network switchbox that is connected to
the same port as the product, the other
device might be interfering. To connect
and use the product, you must
disconnect the other device or you must
use two USB ports on the computer.

Solve performance problems 257

Solve connectivity problems
Solve direct-connect problems
If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the cable.
●

Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product.

●

Verify that the cable is not longer than 2 meters (6 feet). Replace the cable if necessary.

●

Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product. Replace the cable if
necessary.

Solve network problems
Check the following items to verify that the product is communicating with the network. Before beginning,
print a configuration page. See Configuration page on page 172.
Problem

Solution

Poor physical connection

Verify that the product is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the
correct length.
Verify that cable connections are secure.
Look at the network port connection on the back of the product, and verify that the
amber activity light and the green link-status light are lit.
If the problem continues, try a different cable or port on the hub.

The computer is unable to communicate
with the product.

Use the command prompt to ping the product from your computer. For example:
ping 192.168.45.39
Verify that the ping displays round-trip times, which indicates that it is working.
If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that
the network settings, the product, and the computer are all configured for the same
network.

Incorrect link and duplex settings

Hewlett-Packard recommends leaving this setting in automatic mode (the default
setting). See the product user guide for more information.

Incorrect IP address for the product on
the computer

Use the correct IP address.
If the IP address is correct, delete the product and then it add again.

New software programs have caused
compatibility problems.

Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the
correct printer driver.

Your computer or workstation is set up
incorrectly.

Check the network drivers, printer drivers, and the network redirection.
Verify that the operating system is configured correctly.

The protocol is disabled, or other
network settings are incorrect.

Print a configuration page to check the status of the protocol. Enable it if necessary.
Use the control panel to reconfigure the network settings if necessary.

258 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

Service mode functions
Service menu
The SERVICE menu is PIN-protected for added security. Only authorized service people have access
to the SERVICE menu. When you select SERVICE from the list of menus, the product prompts you to
enter an eight-digit PIN number.
●

The PIN for the HP LaserJet P3015 models is 07301509.

1.

Press the Menu button

2.

Press the down arrow button or the up arrow
then press the OK button.

3.

Type the PIN using the alphanumeric keypad (for the base model, use the arrow keys).

4.

Press the OK button to enter the PIN and open the SERVICE menu.

.
button to navigate to the SERVICE menu, and

The following menu items appear in the SERVICE menu:
●

CLEAR EVENT LOG: Use this item to clear the product event log.

●

CLEAR BOOTLOADER PASSWORD: Use this item to clear the password that was set to prevent
someone from performing an unauthorized cold reset, resetting factory defaults, or changing sleep
mode settings from the RESETS menu.

●

TOTAL PAGE COUNT: After replacing the formatter, use this item to reset the page count so that
the figure continues to represent the page count for the product engine.

●

REFURBISH CYCLE COUNT: Use this item to record the page count when the product was
refurbished.

●

SERIAL NUMBER: After replacing the formatter, use this item to reset the product serial number.

●

SERVICE ID: See Service ID on page 261, Restore service ID on page 261, and Convert the
service ID to an actual date on page 261.

●

COLD RESET PAPER: Select this item to rest the default paper size when the formatter is replaced
or factory settings are restored (see Resets menu on page 194).
When a formatter is replaced or factory settings are restored in a country/region that uses A4 as
the standard paper size, use this item to reset the default paper size.

ENWW

Service mode functions 259

Product resets
Restore factory settings
1.

Press the Menu button

.

2.

Open each of the following menus. Press the down arrow
the OK button to select it.
a.

CONFIGURE DEVICE

b.

RESETS

c.

RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS

button to highlight it and then press

For more information, see Resets menu on page 194.

Hard disk initialization
A hard disk initialization will erase and reformat the product's hard disk. Perform hard disk initialization
only if an error code displays on the control panel indicating a disk error. Always try initializing the hard
disk before replacing it.
1.

Turn the product on.

2.

As the product performs its power-on sequence, press and hold the Menu button
lights on the control panel are lit.

3.

Press the back arrow

4.

Press the OK button. The product initializes the hard disk and continues the power-on sequence.

until all three

. The message INITIALIZE DISC displays on the control panel.

Skip disk-load
When the power is turned on the product begins the power-on sequence. By performing a power-on
bypass, you can cause the product to resume the power-on sequence but not to recognize any installed
EIO hard disk. This can be helpful in isolating EIO hard-disk errors.
1.

Turn the product off.

2.

Turn the product on. When the memory count begins, press and hold the button. Continue holding
down the button until all three product control-panel lights flash once and then remain on. This
might take up to 10 seconds.

3.

Press the

button, and then press the Menu button

4.

Press the

button or the

5.

Press the OK button. The product continues the power-on sequence but ignores an installed
EIO hard disk.

.

button until SKIP DISK LOAD is highlighted.

NVRAM initialization
CAUTION: Initializing NVRAM resets the serial number, the event log, the page counts, the calibration
settings, and the EIO card. Use the SERVICE menu to restore the serial number and page counts. You
also need to reconfigure any computers that print to this product to recognize the product. Initialize
NVRAM only when absolutely necessary. In most situations, use a cold reset to reset product variables
but still retain the needed values in the SERVICE menu.

260 Chapter 3 Solve problems

ENWW

NOTE: Before performing a NVRAM initialization, print a menu map and a configuration page. Use
the information on the configuration page to reset any customer-set product configuration values that
the NVRAM initialization procedure changes. Take special not of the page count, service ID, and the
serial number.
1.

Turn the product off.

2.

Remove any installed accessories.

3.

Turn the product on. When the memory count begins, press and hold the down arrow button until
all three product control-panel lights flash once and then remain on. This might take up to 10
seconds.

4.

Press the up arrow

5.

Press the Menu button

6.

Press the up arrow

7.

press OK. The product initializes NVRAM and then continues its power-on sequence.

button.
. The message SKIP DISK LOAD displays on the control panel.

button until NVRAM INIT is highlighted.

Service ID
Use this item to show the date that the product was first used on the control panel. This eliminates the
need for users to keep paper receipts for proof of warranty.
Because the product does not have an internal clock, the availability of the service ID date depends on
the product being connected to a source that can provide the date, in this case a time server on the
same network as the product. When the product is not connected to a date source, the service ID is not
available, and 00000 appears on the configuration page.
Restore service ID
If you replace the formatter, the date is lost. Use this menu item to reset the date to the original date
that the product was first used. The date format is YYDDD. Use the following formula to calculate the
dates:
1.

To calculate YY, subtract 1990 from the calendar year. For instance, if the product was first used
in 2002, calculate YY as follows: 2002 - 1990 = 12. YY = 12.

2.

Subtract 1 from 10 (October is the tenth month of the year): 10 - 1 = 9.
Multiply 9 by 30: 9 x 30 = 270.
-orAdd 17 to 270: 270 + 17 = 287. Thus, DDD = 287.

Convert the service ID to an actual date
You can use the product service ID number to determine whether the product is still under warranty.
Use the following formula to convert the service ID into the installation date as follows:

ENWW

1.

Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the product was installed.

2.

Divide DDD by 30. If there is a remainder, add 1 to the result. This is the month.

3.

The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date.

Service mode functions 261

Using the service ID 12287 as an example, the date conversion is as follows:
1.

12 + 1990 = 2002, so the year is 2002.

2.

287 divided by 30 = 9 with a remainder of 17. Since there is a remainder, add 1 to 9 to get 10,
which represents October.

3.

The remainder in step 2 is 17, so that is the date.

4.

The complete date is 17-October-2002.

NOTE: A six-day grace period is built into the date system.
Reset serial number
Use the service menu to reset the product serial number. See Service mode functions on page 259.
Reset page counts
The page count that is stored in NVRAM and printed on the configuration page represents the number
of pages that the formatter has formatted (not including engine-test prints). If you install a new formatter
when repairing a product, use this menu item to reset the page count to the previous value. In this way,
the page count reflects the number of pages that the engine has printed rather than restarting the count
for the new formatter.
Use the service menu item TOTAL PAGE COUNT to reset the product page counts. See Service mode
functions on page 259.

Product cold reset
A cold reset unlocks menus that have been previously locked and sets all control panel menu items
(including EIO settings) back to the factory defaults. However, it does not clear the values in the Service
mode functions on page 259 menu (such as the serial number and page counts).
NOTE: Before performing a cold reset, print a menu map and a configuration page. Use the information
on the configuration page to reset any customer-set product configuration values that the cold reset
procedure changes.
1.

Turn the product off.

2.

Turn the product on. When the memory count begins, press and hold the OK button. Continue
holding down the OK button until all three product control-panel lights flash once and then remain
on. This might take up to 10 seconds.

3.

After the message SELECT LANGUAGE appears on the display, press the
button until COLD RESET is highlighted.

4.

Press the OK button. The product performs a cold reset and then continues its power-on sequence.

5.

Check all I/O settings and reset any customer-set product configuration values.

262 Chapter 3 Solve problems

button or the

ENWW

Product updates
This product has remote firmware update (RFU) capability. Use this information to upgrade the product
firmware.

Determine the current firmware version
1.

Press the Menu button

.

2.

Press the down arrow

to highlight the INFORMATION menu, and then press the OK button.

3.

Press the down arrow
OK button to print.

to highlight the PRINT CONFIGURATION option, and then press the

The firmware datecode is listed on the configuration page in the section called Device Information.
The firmware datecode has this format: YYYYMMDD XX.XXX.X.
●

The first string of numbers is the date, where YYYY represents the year, MM represents the month,
and DD represents the date.

●

The second string of numbers is the firmware version number, in decimal format.

Download new firmware from the HP Web site
To download the most recent firmware upgrade for the product, go to www.hp.com/go/
ljp3010series_firmware.

Transfer the new firmware to the product
NOTE: The product can receive an .RFU file update when it is in a Ready state.
The following conditions can affect the time required to transfer the file.
●

The speed of the host computer that is sending the update.

●

Any jobs that are ahead of the .RFU job in the queue are completed before the update is processed.

●

If the process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded, you must send the firmware file
again.

●

If power is lost during the firmware update, the update is interrupted and the message Resend
upgrade appears (in English only) on the control-panel display. In this case, you must send the
upgrade by using the USB port.

NOTE: The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory
(NVRAM). Any menu settings that are changed from the default settings might return to default settings
and must be changed again if you want settings that are different from the defaults.

Use the flash executable file to update the firmware
This product has flash-based memory, so you can use the flash firmware executable (.EXE) file to
upgrade the firmware. Download this file from www.hp.com/go/ljp3010series_firmware.

ENWW

Product updates 263

NOTE: To use this method, connect the product directly to your computer through a USB cable, and
install the printer driver for this product on your computer.
1.

Print a configuration page and note the TCP/IP address.

2.

Find the .EXE file on your computer, and double-click it to open the file.

3.

From the Select Printer to Update drop-down list, select this product. Click the Start button to
begin the update process.
CAUTION: Do not turn the product off or try to send a print job during this process.

4.

When the process is complete, a smiling face icon displays in the dialog box. Click the Exit button.

5.

Turn the product off and then on.

6.

Print another configuration page and verify that the new firmware datecode is listed.

Use FTP to upload the firmware through a browser
1.

Make sure the Internet browser you are using is configured for viewing folders from FTP sites.
These instructions are for Microsoft Internet Explorer.
a.

Open the browser and click the Tools menu, and then click the Internet Options menu item.

b.

Click the Advanced tab.

c.

Select the box labeled Enable folder view for FTP sites.

d.

Click the OK button.

2.

Print a configuration page and note the TCP/IP address.

3.

Open a browser window.

4.

In the address line of the browser, type ftp://
, where
is the address of the product. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type ftp:// 192.168.0.90. 5. Locate the downloaded .RFU file for the product. 6. Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT icon in the browser window. NOTE: The product turns off and then on automatically to activate the update. When the update process is complete, a Ready message displays on the product control panel. Use FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection 1. Take note of the IP address on the HP Jetdirect page. The HP Jetdirect page is the second page that prints when you print the configuration page. NOTE: Before upgrading the firmware, make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display. 2. Click the Start button, click the Run menu item, and then type cmd to open the command window. 3. Type ftp . For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type ftp 192.168.0.90. 264 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 4. Go to the folder where the firmware file is stored. 5. Press the Enter key on the keyboard. 6. When prompted for the user name, press the Enter key. 7. When prompted for the password, press the Enter key. 8. Type bin at the command prompt. 9. Press the Enter key. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window. 10. Type put and then the file name. For example, if the file name is ljp3015.rfu, type put ljp3015.rfu. 11. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or computer. NOTE: The product automatically turns off and then on again after processing the upgrade. 12. At the command prompt, type bye to exit the ftp command. 13. At the command prompt, type exit to return to the Windows interface. Use HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the firmware To learn how to use HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the product firmware, go to www.hp.com/go/ webjetadmin. Use Microsoft Windows commands to upgrade the firmware NOTE: This process requires the product to be shared on a network. 1. Click the Start button, click the Run menu item, and then type cmd to open the command window. 2. Type the following: copy /B \\\, where is the name of the .RFU file (including the path), is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared, and is the product share name. For example: C:\>copy /b C:\ljp3015.rfu \\YOUR_SERVER\YOUR_COMPUTER. NOTE: If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type: C:\>copy /b "C:\MY DOCUMENTS\ljp3015.rfu" \ \YOUR_SERVER\YOUR_COMPUTER. 3. Press the Enter key on the keyboard. The control panel shows a message that indicates the progress of the firmware upgrade. At the end of the upgrade process, the control panel shows the Ready message. The message One File Copied appears on the computer screen. Upgrade the HP Jetdirect firmware The HP Jetdirect network interface in the product has firmware that can be upgraded separately from the product firmware. This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin Version 7.0 or later on ENWW Product updates 265 your computer. See the product user guide for more information. Complete the following steps to update the HP Jetdirect firmware by using HP Web Jetadmin. 1. Open the HP Web Jetadmin program. 2. Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to the Device Lists folder. 3. Select the product that you want to update. 4. In the Device Tools drop-down list, select the Jetdirect Firmware Update option. 5. Under the Jetdirect Firmware Version heading the HP Jetdirect model number and current firmware version are listed. Make a note of these. 6. Go to www.hp.com/go/wja_firmware. 7. Scroll down to the list of HP Jetdirect model numbers, and find the model number you wrote down. 8. Look at the current firmware version for the model, and see if it is later than the version you wrote down. If it is, right-click on the firmware link, and follow the instructions on the Web page to download the new firmware file. The file must be saved into the :\PROGRAM FILES \HP WEB JETADMIN\DOC\PLUGINS\HPWJA\FIRMWARE\JETDIRECT folder on the computer that is running the HP Web Jetadmin software. 9. In HP Web Jetadmin, return to the main product list and select the digital sender again. 10. In the Device Tools drop-down list, select the Jetdirect Firmware Update option again. 11. On the HP Jetdirect firmware page, the new firmware version is listed under the Jetdirect Firmware Available on HP Web Jetadmin heading. Click the Update Firmware Now button to update the Jetdirect firmware. NOTE: You also can use FTP or the HP Embedded Web Server to update the HP Jetdirect firmware. For more information, go to www.hp.com/go/wja_firmware. 266 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 4 ENWW Parts and diagrams ● Order parts by authorized service providers ● How to use the parts lists and diagrams ● Assembly locations ● Covers ● Internal assemblies (1 of 6) ● Internal assemblies (2 of 6) ● Internal assemblies (3 of 6) ● Internal assemblies (4 of 6) ● Internal assemblies (5 of 6) ● Internal assemblies (6 of 6) ● Input devices ● Alphabetical parts list ● Numerical parts list 267 Order parts by authorized service providers Order parts, accessories, and supplies Table 4-1 Order parts, accessories, and supplies Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply Order genuine HP parts or accessories www.hp.com/buy/parts Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. Order using HP software For information about using the HP software to order parts, accessories, and supplies, see the product user guide. Related documentation and software Table 4-2 Related documentation and software Item Description Part number HP LaserJet P3010 Series Printers User Guide Product user guide. CE524-90910 HP LaserJet P3010 Series Printers Service Manual English service manual (this manual) CE544-90909 Supplies part numbers Table 4-3 Supplies part numbers Item Description Part number HP LaserJet print cartridge Standard-capacity cartridge CE255A (new) CE225-67901 (service) High-capacity cartridge CE255X (new) CE255-67902 (service) 268 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Accessories part numbers Table 4-4 Accessories part numbers Item Description Part number 144 x 32-pin DDR2 memory DIMM (dual inline memory module) 64 MB CC413A (new) CE524-67901 (kit) NOTE: The kit includes the DIMM and installation instructions. 128 MB CC414A (new) CE524-67902 (kit) NOTE: The kit includes the DIMM and installation instructions. 256 MB CC415A (new) CE524-67903 (kit) NOTE: The kit includes the DIMM and installation instructions. 512 MB CE483A (new) CE524-67904 (kit) NOTE: The kit includes the DIMM and installation instructions. Formatter PCA Base product CE474-67901 (new) CE474-69001 (exchange) Network product CE475-67901 (new) CE475-69001 (exchange) HP Encrypted High Performance hard disk Encrypted hard disk to install in the EIO accessory slot J8019A (new) CE525-69003 (kit) 63 mm (2.5 in) NOTE: The kit includes the hard disk and installation instructions. Optional 500-sheet tray and feeder unit Optional tray to increase paper capacity. CE530A (new) The product can accommodate up to two optional 500-sheet feeders. ENWW CE530-69001 (service) Order parts by authorized service providers 269 Table 4-4 Accessories part numbers (continued) Item Description Part number Enhanced I/O (EIO) cards HP High Performance Serial ATA EIO Hard Disk J6073G 1284B parallel adaptor J7972G Jetdirect EIO wireless 690n (IPv6/IPsec ) J8007G Jetdirect en3700 J7942G Jetdirect en1700 J7988G Jetdirect ew2400 USB wireless print server J7951G Jetdirect 630n EIO networking card (IPv6/gigabit) J7997G Jetdirect 635n EIO networking card (IPv6/IPsec ) J7961G Maintenance kit includes the following items: 110V: CE525-67901 HP Jetdirect print server multi-protocol EIO network cards Service maintenance kit 220V: CE525-67902 USB cable ● Fuser for the appropriate voltage rating ● Transfer roller ● Tray 1 pickup roller ● Tray 1 separation pad ● Tray 2 pickup roller ● Tray 2 separation pad 2-meter A-to-B cable C6518A Whole-unit replacement part numbers Table 4-5 Whole-unit replacement part numbers Item Description Part number HP LaserJet P3015 110V CE525-69001 220V CE525-69002 110V CE526-69001 220V CE526-69002 110V CE528-69001 220V CE528-69002 110V CE529-69001 220V CE529-69002 HP LaserJet P3015d HP LaserJet P3015dn HP LaserJet P3015x 270 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW How to use the parts lists and diagrams CAUTION: Be sure to order the correct part. When looking for part numbers for electrical components, pay careful attention to the voltage that is listed. Doing so will make sure that the part number selected is for the correct model. NOTE: In this manual, the abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit-board assembly.” Components described as a PCA might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and sensors. The figures in this chapter show the major subassemblies in the product and their component parts. A parts list table follows each exploded view assembly diagram. Each table lists the item number, the associated part number, and the description of each part. If a part is not listed in the table, then it is not a field replacement unit (FRU). ENWW How to use the parts lists and diagrams 271 Assembly locations Base product (no optional trays or accessories) Figure 4-1 Base product (no optional trays or accessories) Table 4-6 Base product Item Description Item Description 1 Control panel 7 Power recepticle 2 DIMM cover 8 Tray 2 cassette 3 Front-right and right-side cover assembly 9 Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) 4 Power switch 10 Cartridge-door assembly (print-cartridge door) 5 Left cover 11 Output bin (face-down tray) 6 Rear-door assembly 272 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Base product (optional trays or accessories) Figure 4-2 Base product (optional trays or accessories) Table 4-7 Optional 500-sheet input tray ENWW Item Description 1 Connector 2 Tray 3 or Tray 4 cassette 3 Positioning pin Assembly locations 273 Covers Figure 4-3 Covers DUPLEX TYPE SIMPLEX TYPE 8 6 15 *A04 *A05 6 12 15 4 *A07 3 7 *A04 14 *A04 5 1 *A05 *A05 *A06 *A03 *A05 2 *A02 *A03 13 10 9 *A01 274 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams 11 ENWW Table 4-8 Covers ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Cover, right RC2-7670-000CN 1 2 Cover, right-front RC2-7672-000CN 1 3 Cover, right-rear RC2-7673-000CN 1 4 Cover, DIMM RC2-7674-000CN 1 5 Cover, handle right RC2-7675-000CN 1 6 Cover, upper-right (top-right); duplex models RC2-7676-000CN 1 6 Cover, upper-right (top-right); simplex models RC2-7707-000CN 1 7 Cover, formatter RC2-7688-000CN 1 8 Cover, upper-right (top-right) sub; duplex models RC2-7677-000CN 1 9 Cartridge-door assembly RM1-6264-000CN 1 10 Cover, multipurpose assembly RM1-6265-000CN 1 11 Multipurpose lifting plate assembly RM1-6266-000CN 1 12 Cover, top assembly RM1-6289-000CN 1 13 Cover, left RM1-6291-000CN 1 14 Cover, rear assembly RM1-6292-000CN 1 15 Control panel; duplex models RM1-6518-000CN 1 15 Control panel; duplex models RM1-6519-000CN 1 Covers 275 Internal assemblies (1 of 6) Figure 4-4 Internal assemblies (1 of 6) *A24 5 *A23 *A21 *A02 2 *A22 *A14 1 *A13 *A25 *A26 *A19 *A11 *A22 *A31 *A29 *A08 *A07 *A30 *A28 4 *A12 *A17 *A03 4 *A11 3 *A16 *A11 *A11 *A15 *A22 *A01 *A27 *A11 *A06 *A20 *A18 *A04 *A05 276 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-9 Internal assemblies (1 of 6) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Tag holder assembly RM1-6284-000CN 1 2 Laser/scanner RM1-6322-000CN 1 3 Photo interrupter, TLP1243 WG8-5696-000CN 1 4 Stopper, bushing arm RC2-7933-000CN 2 5 Cable, flat RK2-3103-000CN 1 Internal assemblies (1 of 6) 277 Internal assemblies (2 of 6) Figure 4-5 Internal assemblies (2 of 6) *A01 *A02 *A09 DUPLEX TYPE *A08 TO FIGURE 4-7 Z *A09 *A06 *A03 *A07 *A05 *A21 *A04 *A16 (SL1) (J1602) *A06 *A05 *A09 1 (SL2) (J1601) *A09 2 *A18 *A20 *A09 *A09 *A19 *A15 *A17 *A09 *A11 *A09 *A09 *A09 *A14 *A13 *A12 *A10 278 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-10 Internal assemblies (2 of 6) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Tray 1 solenoid RK2-1490-000CN 1 2 Tray 2 solenoid RK2-1492-000CN 1 Internal assemblies (2 of 6) 279 Internal assemblies (3 of 6) Figure 4-6 Internal assemblies (3 of 6) *A02 1 *A02 *A04 3 6 *A12 *A14 *A05 *A13 5 *A07 *A08 *A09 *A06 5 5 *A03 7 *A02 8 *A10 *A11 4 280 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams 2 *A01 ENWW Table 4-11 Internal assemblies (3 of 6) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Registration roller assembly RM1-6272-000CN 1 2 Roller, multipurpose RL1-2412-000CN 1 3 Transfer lower guide assembly RM1-6315-000CN 1 4 Cassette RM1-6279-000CN 1 5 Base plate roller assembly RM1-6306-000CN 4 6 Roller, transfer RM1-6321-000CN 1 7 Pad, multipurpose separation RC2-8575-000CN 1 8 Separation holder assembly RM1-6303-000CN 1 Internal assemblies (3 of 6) 281 Internal assemblies (4 of 6) Figure 4-7 Internal assemblies (4 of 6) *A15 *A12 *A01 *A11 *A14 A *A05 *A05 *A13 DUPLEX TYPE 8 *A19 *A13 SIMPLEX TYPE (PS225) (J513) DUPLEX TYPE *A04 (FM2) (J8010) *A19 7 (PS215) (J507) 6 *A06 *A06 *A03 *A02 *A05 *A14 1 3 *A06 (J501) *A10 *A17 *A18 9 A *A16 5 *A06 Z (J1610) TO FIGURE 4-5 *A09 *A08 *A06 A SIMPLEX TYPE 4 *A07 Z TO FIGURE 4-5 2 DUPLEX TYPE 282 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-12 Internal assemblies (4 of 6) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Fan, sub RK2-1499-000CN 1 2 Lower paper feed guide; duplex models RM1-6263-000CN 1 3 Paper-feed guide assembly RM1-6270-000CN 1 4 Position-guide assembly; duplex models RM1-6273-000CN 1 5 High-voltage power supply; duplex models RM1-6280-000CN 1 5 High-voltage power supply; simplex models RM1-6300-000CN 1 6 TOP sensor PCA RM1-6511-000CN 1 7 Paper width sensor PCA RM1-6512-000CN 1 8 Switch assembly, power RM1-6283-000CN 1 9 Cable, flat RK2-3101-000CN 1 Internal assemblies (4 of 6) 283 Internal assemblies (5 of 6) Figure 4-8 Internal assemblies (5 of 6) *A10 *A08 *A01 *A10 *A11 *A18 *A17 *A06 (J1803) (J22) 9 *A10 *A13 5 *A13 11 6 (J1608) (J18) 1 (FM1) (J1606) *A03 (J4205) (J1701) *A13 (J471) *A02 (J9998) *A07 (J471) 7 *A12 *A05 8 (SW501) *A11 *A04 *A14 (PS205) *A16 (PS3) (J1603) (J1604) 4 *A13 *A15 *A13 *A19 *A09 10 3 2 *A13 *A13 284 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-13 Internal assemblies (5 of 6) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Fan, main RK2-1497-000CN 1 2 Cassette, paper pickup assembly; duplex models RM1-6268-000CN 1 2 Cassette, paper pickup assembly; simplex models RM1-6299-000CN 1 3 Idler roller assembly RM1-6271-000CN 1 4 Multipurpose sensor PCA RM1-6510-000CN 1 5 Fuser assembly 110V RM1-6274-000CN 1 5 Fuser assembly 220V RM1-6319-000CN 1 6 Engine controller PCA 110V RM1-6281-000CN 1 6 Engine controller PCA 220V RM1-6318-000CN 1 7 Front USB PCA RM1-6514-000CN 1 8 Microswitch WC4-5171-000CN 1 9 Environmental sensor assembly RM1-6515-000CN 2 10 Cassette pickup roller RM1-6313-000CN 1 11 Cable, flat RK2-2788-000CN 1 Internal assemblies (5 of 6) 285 Internal assemblies (6 of 6) Figure 4-9 Internal assemblies (6 of 6) 4 *A18 *A01 *A01 *A01 *A17 5 2 (PS4) (J4) (J8002) *A19 5 *A20 *A09 (M8002) (J8002) (PS1) (J3) *A14 (J1504) *A15 (J1801) (J8007) *A16 *A03 3 3 *A10 *A16 *A13 *A05 *A12 *A08 *A16 1 (SW235) (J1612) *A02 *A16 *A11 *A16 *A06 *A04 *A07 *A16 *A02 286 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-14 Internal assemblies (6 of 6) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Tray sensor PCA RM1-6487-000CN 1 2 Fuser motor assembly RM1-6296-000CN 1 3 Paper delivery roller assembly RM1-6301-000CN 4 4 Face-down roller assembly RM1-6311-000CN 1 5 Photo interrupter, TLP1243 WG8-5696-000CN 2 Internal assemblies (6 of 6) 287 Input devices 500-sheet input tray (Tray 3 and Tray 4) Figure 4-10 500-sheet input tray (Tray 3 and Tray 4) 4 3 2 1 288 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-15 500-sheet input tray (Tray 3 and Tray 4) Ref ENWW Description Part number Qty Optional 500-sheet tray and feeder unit CE530-69001 1 1 Base plate roller assembly RM1-6306-000CN 4 2 Cassette RM1-6279-000CN 1 3 Pickup roller set, cassette RM1-6313-000CN 1 4 Separation holder assembly RM1-6303-000CN 1 Input devices 289 Alphabetical parts list Table 4-16 Alphabetical parts list Description Part number Table and page Base plate roller assembly RM1-6306-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 6) on page 281 Base plate roller assembly RM1-6306-000CN 500-sheet input tray (Tray 3 and Tray 4) on page 289 Cable, flat RK2-3103-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 6) on page 277 Cable, flat RK2-3101-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 Cable, flat RK2-2788-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 Cartridge-door assembly RM1-6264-000CN Covers on page 275 Cassette RM1-6279-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 6) on page 281 Cassette RM1-6279-000CN 500-sheet input tray (Tray 3 and Tray 4) on page 289 Cassette pickup roller RM1-6313-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 Cassette, paper pickup assembly; duplex models RM1-6268-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 Cassette, paper pickup assembly; simplex models RM1-6299-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 Control panel; duplex models RM1-6518-000CN Covers on page 275 Control panel; duplex models RM1-6519-000CN Covers on page 275 Cover, DIMM RC2-7674-000CN Covers on page 275 Cover, formatter RC2-7688-000CN Covers on page 275 Cover, handle right RC2-7675-000CN Covers on page 275 Cover, left RM1-6291-000CN Covers on page 275 Cover, multipurpose assembly RM1-6265-000CN Covers on page 275 Cover, rear assembly RM1-6292-000CN Covers on page 275 Cover, right RC2-7670-000CN Covers on page 275 Cover, right-front RC2-7672-000CN Covers on page 275 Cover, right-rear RC2-7673-000CN Covers on page 275 Cover, top assembly RM1-6289-000CN Covers on page 275 Cover, upper-right (top-right) sub; duplex models RC2-7677-000CN Covers on page 275 Cover, upper-right (top-right); duplex models RC2-7676-000CN Covers on page 275 Cover, upper-right (top-right); simplex models RC2-7707-000CN Covers on page 275 290 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-16 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Engine controller PCA 110V RM1-6281-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 Engine controller PCA 220V RM1-6318-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 Environmental sensor assembly RM1-6515-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 Face-down roller assembly RM1-6311-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 6) on page 287 Fan, main RK2-1497-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 Fan, sub RK2-1499-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 Front USB PCA RM1-6514-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 Fuser assembly 110V RM1-6274-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 Fuser assembly 220V RM1-6319-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 Fuser motor assembly RM1-6296-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 6) on page 287 High-voltage power supply; duplex models RM1-6280-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 High-voltage power supply; simplex models RM1-6300-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 Idler roller assembly RM1-6271-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 Laser/scanner RM1-6322-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 6) on page 277 Lower paper feed guide; duplex models RM1-6263-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 Microswitch WC4-5171-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 Multipurpose lifting plate assembly RM1-6266-000CN Covers on page 275 Multipurpose sensor PCA RM1-6510-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 Optional 500-sheet tray and feeder unit CE530-69001 500-sheet input tray (Tray 3 and Tray 4) on page 289 Pad, multipurpose separation RC2-8575-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 6) on page 281 Paper delivery roller assembly RM1-6301-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 6) on page 287 Paper width sensor PCA RM1-6512-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 Alphabetical parts list 291 Table 4-16 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Paper-feed guide assembly RM1-6270-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 Photo interrupter, TLP1243 WG8-5696-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 6) on page 277 Photo interrupter, TLP1243 WG8-5696-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 6) on page 287 Pickup roller set, cassette RM1-6313-000CN 500-sheet input tray (Tray 3 and Tray 4) on page 289 Position-guide assembly; duplex models RM1-6273-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 Registration roller assembly RM1-6272-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 6) on page 281 Roller, multipurpose RL1-2412-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 6) on page 281 Roller, transfer RM1-6321-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 6) on page 281 Separation holder assembly RM1-6303-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 6) on page 281 Separation holder assembly RM1-6303-000CN 500-sheet input tray (Tray 3 and Tray 4) on page 289 Stopper, bushing arm RC2-7933-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 6) on page 277 Switch assembly, power RM1-6283-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 Tag holder assembly RM1-6284-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 6) on page 277 TOP sensor PCA RM1-6511-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 Transfer lower guide assembly RM1-6315-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 6) on page 281 Tray sensor PCA RM1-6487-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 6) on page 287 Tray 1 solenoid RK2-1490-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 6) on page 279 Tray 2 solenoid RK2-1492-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 6) on page 279 292 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Numerical parts list Table 4-17 Numerical parts list ENWW Part number Description Table and page CE530-69001 Optional 500-sheet tray and feeder unit 500-sheet input tray (Tray 3 and Tray 4) on page 289 RC2-7670-000CN Cover, right Covers on page 275 RC2-7672-000CN Cover, right-front Covers on page 275 RC2-7673-000CN Cover, right-rear Covers on page 275 RC2-7674-000CN Cover, DIMM Covers on page 275 RC2-7675-000CN Cover, handle right Covers on page 275 RC2-7676-000CN Cover, upper-right (top-right); duplex models Covers on page 275 RC2-7677-000CN Cover, upper-right (top-right) sub; duplex models Covers on page 275 RC2-7688-000CN Cover, formatter Covers on page 275 RC2-7707-000CN Cover, upper-right (top-right); simplex models Covers on page 275 RC2-7933-000CN Stopper, bushing arm Internal assemblies (1 of 6) on page 277 RC2-8575-000CN Pad, multipurpose separation Internal assemblies (3 of 6) on page 281 RK2-1490-000CN Tray 1 solenoid Internal assemblies (2 of 6) on page 279 RK2-1492-000CN Tray 2 solenoid Internal assemblies (2 of 6) on page 279 RK2-1497-000CN Fan, main Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 RK2-1499-000CN Fan, sub Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 RK2-2788-000CN Cable, flat Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 RK2-3101-000CN Cable, flat Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 RK2-3103-000CN Cable, flat Internal assemblies (1 of 6) on page 277 RL1-2412-000CN Roller, multipurpose Internal assemblies (3 of 6) on page 281 RM1-6263-000CN Lower paper feed guide; duplex models Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 RM1-6264-000CN Cartridge-door assembly Covers on page 275 RM1-6265-000CN Cover, multipurpose assembly Covers on page 275 RM1-6266-000CN Multipurpose lifting plate assembly Covers on page 275 RM1-6268-000CN Cassette, paper pickup assembly; duplex models Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 Numerical parts list 293 Table 4-17 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number Description Table and page RM1-6270-000CN Paper-feed guide assembly Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 RM1-6271-000CN Idler roller assembly Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 RM1-6272-000CN Registration roller assembly Internal assemblies (3 of 6) on page 281 RM1-6273-000CN Position-guide assembly; duplex models Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 RM1-6274-000CN Fuser assembly 110V Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 RM1-6279-000CN Cassette Internal assemblies (3 of 6) on page 281 RM1-6279-000CN Cassette 500-sheet input tray (Tray 3 and Tray 4) on page 289 RM1-6280-000CN High-voltage power supply; duplex models Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 RM1-6281-000CN Engine controller PCA 110V Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 RM1-6283-000CN Switch assembly, power Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 RM1-6284-000CN Tag holder assembly Internal assemblies (1 of 6) on page 277 RM1-6289-000CN Cover, top assembly Covers on page 275 RM1-6291-000CN Cover, left Covers on page 275 RM1-6292-000CN Cover, rear assembly Covers on page 275 RM1-6296-000CN Fuser motor assembly Internal assemblies (6 of 6) on page 287 RM1-6299-000CN Cassette, paper pickup assembly; simplex models Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 RM1-6300-000CN High-voltage power supply; simplex models Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 RM1-6301-000CN Paper delivery roller assembly Internal assemblies (6 of 6) on page 287 RM1-6303-000CN Separation holder assembly Internal assemblies (3 of 6) on page 281 RM1-6303-000CN Separation holder assembly 500-sheet input tray (Tray 3 and Tray 4) on page 289 RM1-6306-000CN Base plate roller assembly Internal assemblies (3 of 6) on page 281 RM1-6306-000CN Base plate roller assembly 500-sheet input tray (Tray 3 and Tray 4) on page 289 RM1-6311-000CN Face-down roller assembly Internal assemblies (6 of 6) on page 287 294 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-17 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page RM1-6313-000CN Cassette pickup roller Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 RM1-6313-000CN Pickup roller set, cassette 500-sheet input tray (Tray 3 and Tray 4) on page 289 RM1-6315-000CN Transfer lower guide assembly Internal assemblies (3 of 6) on page 281 RM1-6318-000CN Engine controller PCA 220V Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 RM1-6319-000CN Fuser assembly 220V Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 RM1-6321-000CN Roller, transfer Internal assemblies (3 of 6) on page 281 RM1-6322-000CN Laser/scanner Internal assemblies (1 of 6) on page 277 RM1-6487-000CN Tray sensor PCA Internal assemblies (6 of 6) on page 287 RM1-6510-000CN Multipurpose sensor PCA Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 RM1-6511-000CN TOP sensor PCA Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 RM1-6512-000CN Paper width sensor PCA Internal assemblies (4 of 6) on page 283 RM1-6514-000CN Front USB PCA Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 RM1-6515-000CN Environmental sensor assembly Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 RM1-6518-000CN Control panel; duplex models Covers on page 275 RM1-6519-000CN Control panel; duplex models Covers on page 275 WC4-5171-000CN Microswitch Internal assemblies (5 of 6) on page 285 WG8-5696-000CN Photo interrupter, TLP1243 Internal assemblies (1 of 6) on page 277 WG8-5696-000CN Photo interrupter, TLP1243 Internal assemblies (6 of 6) on page 287 Numerical parts list 295 296 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW A ENWW Service and support ● Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement ● HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet print cartridge limited warranty statement ● End User License Agreement ● Customer self-repair warranty service ● Customer support ● Repack the product ● Service information form 297 Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement HP PRODUCT DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY HP LaserJet P3015, P3015d, P3015n, CP3015dn, CP3015x One-year limited warranty HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new. HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects. HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product. HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use. Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country/region to country/region, state to state, or province to province. HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU. 298 Appendix A Service and support ENWW HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet print cartridge limited warranty statement This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship. This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refilled, refurbished, remanufactured or tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use. To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP's option, HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU. ENWW HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet print cartridge limited warranty statement 299 End User License Agreement PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT: This End-User License Agreement (“EULA”) is a contract between (a) you (either an individual or the entity you represent) and (b) Hewlett-Packard Company (“HP”) that governs your use of the software product (“Software”). This EULA does not apply if there is a separate license agreement between you and HP or its suppliers for the Software, including a license agreement in online documentation. The term “Software” may include (i) associated media, (ii) a user guide and other printed materials, and (iii) “online” or electronic documentation (collectively “User Documentation”). RIGHTS IN THE SOFTWARE ARE OFFERED ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU AGREE TO ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA. BY INSTALLING, COPYING, DOWNLOADING, OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THIS EULA, DO NOT INSTALL, DOWNLOAD, OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE. IF YOU PURCHASED THE SOFTWARE BUT DO NOT AGREE TO THIS EULA, PLEASE RETURN THE SOFTWARE TO YOUR PLACE OF PURCHASE WITHIN FOURTEEN DAYS FOR A REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE; IF THE SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED ON OR MADE AVAILABLE WITH ANOTHER HP PRODUCT, YOU MAY RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT. 1. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. The Software may include, in addition to HP proprietary software (“HP Software”), software under licenses from third parties (“Third Party Software” and “Third Party License”). Any Third Party Software is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the corresponding Third Party License. Generally, the Third Party License is located in a file such as license.txt; you should contact HP support if you cannot find any Third Party License. If the Third Party Licenses include licenses that provide for the availability of source code (such as the GNU General Public License) and the corresponding source code is not included with the Software, then check the product support pages of HP’s website (hp.com) to learn how to obtain such source code. 2. LICENSE RIGHTS. You will have the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA: a. Use. HP grants you a license to Use one copy of the HP Software. “Use” means installing, copying, storing, loading, executing, displaying, or otherwise using the HP Software. You may not modify the HP Software or disable any licensing or control feature of the HP Software. If this Software is provided by HP for Use with an imaging or printing product (for example, if the Software is a printer driver, firmware, or add-on), the HP Software may only be used with such product (“HP Product”). Additional restrictions on Use may appear in the User Documentation. You may not separate component parts of the HP Software for Use. You do not have the right to distribute the HP Software. b. Copying. Your right to copy means you may make archival or back-up copies of the HP Software, provided each copy contains all the original HP Software’s proprietary notices and is used only for backup purposes. 3. UPGRADES. To Use HP Software provided by HP as an upgrade, update, or supplement (collectively “Upgrade”), you must first be licensed for the original HP Software identified by HP as eligible for the Upgrade. To the extent the Upgrade supersedes the original HP Software, you may no longer use such HP Software. This EULA applies to each Upgrade unless HP provides other terms with the Upgrade. In case of a conflict between this EULA and such other terms, the other terms will prevail. 4. TRANSFER. a. Third Party Transfer. The initial end user of the HP Software may make a one-time transfer of the HP Software to another end user. Any transfer will include all component parts, media, User Documentation, this EULA, and if applicable, the Certificate of Authenticity. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the transferred 300 Appendix A Service and support ENWW Software will agree to this EULA. Upon transfer of the HP Software, your license is automatically terminated. b. Restrictions. You may not rent, lease or lend the HP Software or Use the HP Software for commercial timesharing or bureau use. You may not sublicense, assign or otherwise transfer the HP Software except as expressly provided in this EULA. 5. PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. All intellectual property rights in the Software and User Documentation are owned by HP or its suppliers and are protected by law, including applicable copyright, trade secret, patent, and trademark laws. You will not remove any product identification, copyright notice, or proprietary restriction from the Software. 6. LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the HP Software, except and only to the extent that the right to do so is allowed under applicable law. 7. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. HP and its affiliates may collect and use technical information you provide in relation to (i) your Use of the Software or the HP Product, or (ii) the provision of support services related to the Software or the HP Product. All such information will be subject to HP’s privacy policy. HP will not use such information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary to enhance your Use or provide support services. 8. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Notwithstanding any damages that you might incur, the entire liability of HP and its suppliers under this EULA and your exclusive remedy under this EULA will be limited to the greater of the amount actually paid by you for the Product or U.S. $5.00. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, PERSONAL INJURY, OR LOSS OF PRIVACY) RELATED IN ANY WAY TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF HP OR ANY SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND EVEN IF THE ABOVE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. Some states or other jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. 9. U.S. GOVERNMENT CUSTOMERS. If you are a U.S. Government entity, then consistent with FAR 12.211 and FAR 12.212, Commercial Computer Software, Computer Software Documentation, and Technical Data for Commercial Items are licensed under the applicable HP commercial license agreement. 10. COMPLIANCE WITH EXPORT LAWS. You will comply with all laws, rules, and regulations (i) applicable to the export or import of the Software, or (ii) restricting the Use of the Software, including any restrictions on nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons proliferation. 11. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS. HP and its suppliers reserve all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. (c) 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Rev. 11/06 ENWW End User License Agreement 301 Customer self-repair warranty service HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts to minimize repair time and allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement. If during the diagnosis period, HP identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement. There are two categories of CSR parts: 1) Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory. If you request HP to replace these parts, you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service. 2) Parts for which customer self repair is optional. These parts are also designed for Customer Self Repair. If, however, you require that HP replace them for you, this may be done at no additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your product. Based on availability and where geography permits, CSR parts will be shipped for next business day delivery. Same-day or four-hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography permits. If assistance is required, you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over the phone. HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether a defective part must be returned to HP. In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP, you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time, normally five (5) business days. The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material. Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement. With a customer self repair, HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the courier/carrier to be used. 302 Appendix A Service and support ENWW Customer support Get telephone support, free during your warranty period, for your country/region Country/region phone numbers are on the flyer that was in the box with your product or at www.hp.com/support/. Have the product name, serial number, date of purchase, and problem description ready. ENWW Get 24-hour Internet support www.hp.com/support/ljp3010series Get support for products used with a Macintosh computer www.hp.com/go/macosx Download software utilities, drivers, and electronic information www.hp.com/go/ljp3010series_software Order additional HP service or maintenance agreements www.hp.com/go/carepack Customer support 303 Repack the product If HP Customer Care determines that your product needs to be returned to HP for repair, follow these steps to repack the product before shipping it. CAUTION: Shipping damage as a result of inadequate packing is the customer’s responsibility. 1. Remove and retain any DIMMs cards that you have purchased and installed in the product. CAUTION: Static electricity can damage electronic parts. When handling DIMMs, either wear an antistatic wrist strap, or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal on the product. To remove the DIMMs, see DIMM cover and DIMM on page 57. 2. Remove and retain the print cartridge. CAUTION: It is extremely important to remove the print cartridge before shipping the product. A print cartridge that remains in the product during shipping can leak and cover the product engine and other parts with toner. To prevent damage to the print cartridge, avoid touching the roller on it, and store the print cartridge in its original packing material or so that it is not exposed to light. 3. Remove and retain the power cable, interface cable, and optional accessories, such as an EIO card. 4. If possible, include print samples and 50 to 100 sheets of paper or other print media that did not print correctly. 5. In the U.S., call HP Customer Care to request new packing material. In other areas, use the original packing material, if possible. Hewlett-Packard recommends insuring the equipment for shipment. 304 Appendix A Service and support ENWW Service information form WHO IS RETURNING THE EQUIPMENT? Date: Person to contact: Phone: Alternate contact: Phone: Return shipping address: Special shipping instructions: WHAT ARE YOU SENDING? Model number: Model name: Serial number: Please attach any relevant printouts. Do NOT ship accessories (manuals, cleaning supplies, and so on) that are not required to complete the repair. HAVE YOU REMOVED THE PRINT CARTRIDGES? You must remove them before shipping the printer, unless a mechanical problem prevents you from doing so. [ ] No, I cannot remove them. [ ] Yes. WHAT NEEDS TO BE DONE? (Attach a separate sheet if necessary.) 1. Describe the conditions of the failure. (What was the failure? What were you doing when the failure occurred? What software were you running? Is the failure repeatable?) 2. If the failure is intermittent, how much time elapses between failures? 3. If the unit connected to any of the following, give the manufacturer and model number. Modem: Personal computer: Network: 4. Additional comments: HOW WILL YOU PAY FOR THE REPAIR? Purchase/received date: [ ] Under warranty (Attach proof of purchase or receiving document with original received date.) [ ] Maintenance contract number: [ ] Purchase order number: Except for contract and warranty service, a purchase order number and/or authorized signature must accompany any request for service. If standard repair prices do not apply, a minimum purchase order is required. Standard repair prices can be obtained by contacting an HP-authorized repair center. Authorized signature: Billing address: ENWW Phone: Special billing instructions: Service information form 305 306 Appendix A Service and support ENWW B ENWW Specifications ● Physical specifications ● Electrical specifications ● Acoustic specifications ● Environmental specifications 307 Physical specifications Table B-1 Product dimensions and weights Product model Height Depth Width Weight Base, d, n, and dn models 316 mm (12.4 in) 412 mm (16.2 in) 448 mm (17.6 in) 15.9 kg (35.1 lb) x model 456 mm (17.9 in) 412 mm (16.2 in) 448 mm (17.6 in) 21.2 kg (46.8 lb) Optional 500-sheet feeder 140 mm (5.5 in) 412 mm (16.2 in) 448 mm (17.6 in) 5.3 kg (11.7 lb) Table B-2 Product dimensions with all doors and trays fully opened Product model Height Depth Width Base, d, n, and dn models 347 mm (13.7 in) 1040 mm (41.0 in) 448 mm (17.6 in) x model 487 mm (19.2 in) 1040 mm (41.0 in) 448 mm (17.6 in) Electrical specifications WARNING! Power requirements are based on the country/region where the product is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. This can damage the product and void the product warranty. Table B-3 Power requirements Specification 110-volt models 220-volt models Power requirements 100 to 127 Vac 220 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 8.6 Amps 4.2 Amps Rated current Table B-4 Power consumption (average, in watts)1 Model Printing2 Ready or standby,4 Sleep3 Off HP LaserJet P3015 780 W 14.5 W 8.5 W 0.6 W 1 Values are based on preliminary data. See www.hp.com/go/ljp3010series_regulatory for current information. 2 Power numbers are the highest values measured using all standard voltages. 3 Default time from Ready mode to Sleep = 30 minutes. 4 Heat dissipation in Ready mode = 50 BTU/hour. Acoustic specifications Table B-5 Sound power and pressure level Product model Sound power level1, 2 Declared per ISO 9296 HP LaserJet P3015 models Printing LWAd= 6.8 Bels (A) [68 dB(A)] Ready Inaudible 308 Appendix B Specifications ENWW Table B-5 Sound power and pressure level (continued) Product model Sound power level1, 2 Declared per ISO 9296 Product model Sound pressure level bystander1, 2 Declared per ISO 9296 HP LaserJet P3015 models Printing LpAm=54 dB (A) Ready Inaudible 1 Values are based on preliminary data. See www.hp.com/support/ljp3010series for current information. 2 Configuration tested: HP LaserJet P3015dn printing simplex on A4 paper. Environmental specifications Table B-6 Necessary conditions ENWW Environmental condition Recommended Allowed Temperature (Product and print cartridge) 17.5° to 25°C (63° to 77°) -20° to 60°C (-4° to 140°F) Relative humidity 30% to 70% 10% to 90% Environmental specifications 309 310 Appendix B Specifications ENWW C ENWW Regulatory information ● FCC regulations ● Environmental product stewardship program ● Declaration of conformity ● Safety statements 311 FCC regulations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ● Increase separation between equipment and receiver. ● Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located. ● Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician. NOTE: Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules. 312 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Environmental product stewardship program Protecting the environment Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment. Ozone production This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3). Power consumption Power usage drops significantly while in Ready and Sleep mode, which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of this product. To determine the ENERGY STAR® qualification status for this product, see the Product Data Sheet or Specifications Sheet. Qualified products are also listed at: www.hp.com/go/energystar Toner consumption EconoMode uses less toner, which might extend the life of the print cartridge. Paper use This product’s optional automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and N-up printing (multiple pages printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources. Plastics Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life. HP LaserJet print supplies It’s easy to return and recycle your HP LaserJet print cartridges after use—free of charge—with HP Planet Partners. Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package. You help reduce the toll on the environment further when you return multiple cartridges together rather than separately. HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are environmentally sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, customer use and recycling. When you participate in the HP Planet Partners program, we ensure your HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled properly, processing them to recover plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons of waste from landfills. Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials, it will not be returned to you. Thank you for being environmentally responsible! NOTE: Use the return label to return original HP LaserJet print cartridges only. Please do not use this label for HP inkjet cartridges, non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges or warranty returns. For information about recycling your HP inkjet cartridges please go to http://www.hp.com/ recycle. ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 313 Return and recycling instructions United States and Puerto Rico The enclosed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or more HP LaserJet print cartridges after use. Please follow the applicable instructions below. Multiple returns (more than one cartridge) 1. Package each HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original box and bag. 2. Tape the boxes together using strapping or packaging tape. The package can weigh up to 31 kg (70 lb). 3. Use a single pre-paid shipping label. OR 1. Use your own suitable box, or request a free bulk collection box from www.hp.com/recycle or 1-800-340-2445 (holds up to 31 kg (70 lb) of HP LaserJet print cartridges). 2. Use a single pre-paid shipping label. Single returns 1. Package the HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original bag and box. 2. Place the shipping label on the front of the box. Shipping For all HP LaserJet print cartridge recycling returns, give the package to UPS during your next delivery or pickup, or take it to an authorized UPS drop-off center. For the location of your local UPS drop-off center, call 1-800-PICKUPS or visit www.ups.com. If you are returning via USPS label, give the package to a U.S. Postal Service carrier or drop off at a U.S. Postal Service Office. For more information, or to order additional labels or boxes for bulk returns, visit www.hp.com/recycle or call 1-800-340-2445. Requested UPS pickup will be charged normal pickup rates. Information subject to change without notice. Residents of Alaska and Hawaii Do not use the UPS label. Call 1-800-340-2445 for information and instructions. The U.S. Postal Service provides no-cost cartridge return transportation services under an arrangement with HP for Alaska and Hawaii. Non-U.S. returns To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program, just follow the simple directions in the recycling guide (found inside the packaging of your new product supply item) or visit www.hp.com/ recycle. Select your country/region for information on how to return your HP LaserJet printing supplies. Paper This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN12281:2002. 314 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Material restrictions This HP product does not contain added mercury. This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end-of-life. The batteries contained in or supplied by Hewlett-Packard for this product include the following: HP LaserJet P3010 Series Type Carbon monofluoride lithium Weight 1.5 g Location On formatter board User-removable No For recycling information, you can go to www.hp.com/recycle, or contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at: www.hp.com/go/reach. ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 315 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example, toner) can be obtained by accessing the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/msds or www.hp.com/hpinfo/ community/environment/productinfo/safety. For more information To obtain information about these environmental topics: ● Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products ● HP’s commitment to the environment ● HP’s environmental management system ● HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program ● Material Safety Data Sheets Visit www.hp.com/go/environment or www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment. 316 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Declaration of conformity Declaration of Conformity according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1, DoC#: BOISB-0804-00-rel.1.0 Manufacturer's Name: Manufacturer's Address: Hewlett-Packard Company 11311 Chinden Boulevard, Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA declares, that the product Product Name: HP LaserJet P3010 series Including: CE530A - Optional 500-sheet tray Regulatory Model Number2): Product Options: BOISB-0804-00 ALL Print Cartridges: CE255A /CE255X conforms to the following Product Specifications: Safety: IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001 +A11 IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A1 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product) GB4943-2001 EMC: CISPR22:2005 / EN 55022:2006 - Class B1) EN 61000-3-2:2006 EN 61000-3-3:1995 +A1 EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2 FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B2) / ICES-003, Issue 4 GB9254-1998, GB17625.1-2003 Supplementary Information: The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, and carries the CE-Marking accordingly. This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems. 2) For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the marketing name or the product number(s). Boise, Idaho , USA May 30, 2009 For regulatory topics only: European Contact: Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe,, Herrenberger Strasse 140, , D-71034, Böblingen, (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143), www.hp.com/go/certificates USA Contact: ENWW Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company,, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015, , (Phone: 208-396-6000) Declaration of conformity 317 Safety statements Laser safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation. WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation. Canadian DOC regulations Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements. « Conforme à la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques. « CEM ». » VCCI statement (Japan) Power cord statement (Japan) EMC statement (Korea) 318 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Laser statement for Finland Luokan 1 laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat HP LaserJet P3015, P3015d, P3015dn, P3015x, laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti. VAROITUS ! Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. VARNING ! Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. HUOLTO HP LaserJet P3015, P3015d, P3015dn, P3015x - kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja. VARO ! Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen. VARNING ! Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 775-795 nm Teho 5 m W Luokan 3B laser. ENWW Safety statements 319 Substances Table (China) 320 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Index A accessories ordering 268 acoustic specifications 308 address, TCP/IPv6 189 after service checklist 48 AppleTalk settings 190 B batteries included 315 black page, problem-solving 253 blank page problem-solving 247 blank pages troubleshooting 257 blurred print, problemsolving 254 both sides, printing on Show Me How menu 174 C cables USB, troubleshooting 257 Canadian DOC regulations 318 cartridge memory tag 32 ordering 268 part number 268 removing 52 cartridge-door assembly removing 71 cartridges recycling 313 warranty 299 cassette Tray 2, removing 54 Tray 3, removing 54 Tray 4, removing 54 cautions iii characters, misformed 251 ENWW checklists after service 48 preservice 48 circuit diagram 170 cold reset 262 configuration page, printing 176 Configure device menu 178 control panel cleaning page, printing 172 default settings, restoring 262 messages, types of 197 removing 74 control-panel menus accessing 174 Configure device 178 Diagnostics 194 EIO Jetdirect menu 187 Embedded Jetdirect 187 I/O (input/output) 187 Information 176 Manage supplies 177 opening 174 Paper handling 177 PCL sub-menu 179 Print quality 180 Printing 178 Resets 194 Retrieve job 175 Service 259 Show Me How 174 System setup 183 conventions, document iii covers cartridge-door assembly, removing 71 DIMM, removing 57 formatter, removing 60 front right, removing 76 left, removing 66 lower-right and bracket, removing 80 multipurpose tray cover, removing 69 right, removing 76 right-rear, removing 68 top cover, removing 84 top-right, removing 73 tray 1 cover, removing 69 creased paper, problemsolving 252 crooked pages 251 curled paper, problemsolving 252 customer support online 303 repacking product 304 service information form 305 D date code, service ID 261 declaration of conformity 317 default settings, restoring cold reset 262 demonstration page, printing 176 density problem-solving 247 developing stage 29 DHCP settings 188 diagnostics engine 134 networks 191 skip disk-load 260 Diagnostics menu 194 dimensions, product 308 DIMM removing 57 DIMM cover removing 57 Index 321 disk initialization 260 disposal, end-of-life 315 DLC/LLC settings 190 DNS settings IPV4 189 IPV6 189 document conventions iii doors rear assembly, removing 62 dots, problem-solving 248, 253 double-sided printing Show Me How menu 174 dropouts, problem-solving 249 drum cleaning stage 31 duplex media-feed assembly removing 104 duplexer Show Me How menu 174 E ECU removing 110 EIO Jetdirect menu 187 EIO cards settings 187 electrical specifications 308 electrostatic discharge (ESD) 46 Embedded Jetdirect menu 187 end-of-life disposal 315 energy specifications 308 engine test 134 engine-control system 6 envelopes jams 245 wrinkled, problem-solving 252 environment for product specifications 309 environmental stewardship program 313 error messages event log, listed numerically 217 types of 197 ESD (electrostatic discharge) 46 European Union, waste disposal 315 event log messages, listed numerically 217 322 Index print 215 sample 216 view 215 F fan sub, removing 118 file directory, printing 176 Finnish laser safety statement 319 firmware, upgrading 263 font list, printing PCL 177 PS 177 formatter ordering 269 part number 269 service ID 261 formatter cover removing 60 formatter lights 133 formatter PCA removing 60 front-right cover, removing 76 fuser removing 100 fuser motor, removing 117 fusing stage 30 G gray background, problemsolving 250 H hard disk initialization 260 heartbeat LED 133 help, Show Me How menu 174 HP Customer Care 303 HP Jetdirect print server firmware updates 266 lights 133 HP Web Jetadmin firmware updates 265 humidity specifications 309 I I/O (input/output) menu 187 image defects, problemsolving 247 image repetition, problemsolving 254 Information menu 176 initializing hard disk 260 input trays configuring 177 IP address default 188 IPv4 settings 188 IPv6 settings 189 IPX/SPX settings 190 J jams common causes of 219 envelopes 245 preventing 240 recovery 241 Show Me How menu 174 Japanese VCCI statement 318 Jetadmin firmware updates 265 Jetdirect print server firmware updates 266 lights 133 K Korean EMC statement 318 L laser beam exposure stage 28 laser safety statements 318, 319 laser/scanner operations 24 removing 107 left cover removing 66 license, software 300 light print problem-solving 247 lights formatter 133 lines horizontal, problemsolving 249, 253 lines vertical, problemsolving 252 lines, problem-solving 249, 253 link speed settings 193 loading Show Me How menu 174 ENWW location assemblies (base product) 272 covers 274 internal assemblies 276 optional trays or accessories (base product) 273 log of events messages, listed numerically 217 loose toner, problem-solving 250 lower-right cover and bracket, removing 80 M Macintosh support 303 Manage supplies menu 177 material restrictions 315 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 316 media Show Me How menu 174 memory DIMM, removing 57 NVRAM initialization 260 ordering 269 part numbers 269 print cartridge 32 menu map, printing 176 menus, control panel default settings, restoring 262 menus, control-panel accessing 174 Configure device 178 Diagnostics 194 EIO Jetdirect menu 187 Embedded Jetdirect 187 I/O (input/output) 187 Information 176 Manage supplies 177 Paper handling 177 PCL sub-menu 179 Print quality 180 Printing 178 Resets 194 Retrieve job 175 Service 259 Show Me How 174 System setup 183 ENWW mercury-free product 315 messages event log, listed numerically 217 types of 197 misformed characters, problemsolving 251 multipurpose tray cover removing 69 N networks diagnostics 191 link speed settings 193 protocols 187 security 187 settings 187 noise specifications 308 notes iii NVRAM initialization 260 O online support 303 operating environment specifications 309 operations engine-control system 6 laser/scanner 24 print cartridge memory 32 ordering 500-sheet tray 269 formatter 269 memory 269 print cartridge 268 product documents 268 supplies and accessories 268 whole-unit replacement 270 P packaging product 304 pages blank 257 not printing 257 printing slowly 257 paper curled 252 Show Me How menu 174 skewed 251 wrinkled 252 Paper handling menu 177 part number 500-sheet tray 269 formatter 269 memory 269 print cartridge 268 whole-unit replacement 270 parts 500-sheet input tray 288 assemblies (base product) 272 covers 274 internal assemblies 276 optional trays or accessories (base product) 273 PCL font list, printing 177 PCL sub-menu 179 physical specifications 308 post-service tests 48 power specifications 308 preservice checklist 48 primary charging stage 28 print cartridge memory tag 32 ordering 268 part number 268 removing 52 print cartridges recycling 313 warranty 299 print quality black page 253 blurred 254 dropouts 249 gray background 250 horizontal lines 249 image defects 247 light print 247 lines 249 loose toner 250 misformed characters 251 repeating defects 251 repetitive images 254 scattered lines 253 smeared toner 250 specks 248 tire tracks 253 white horizontal lines 253 white lines vertical 252 white spots 253 Print quality menu 180 Index 323 print-quality test 48 printing troubleshooting 257 Printing menu 178 problem-solving black page 253 blank page 247 blurred print 254 checklist 128 curled paper 252 dropouts 249 event-log messages, numerical list 217 gray background 250 image defects 247 light print 247 lines 249 lines horizontal 249, 253 lines vertical 252 messages, types of 197 networks 191 repeating defects 251 repetitive images 254 scattered lines 253 Show Me How menu 174 skewed pages 251 smeared toner 250 specks 248 text quality 251, 254 tire tracks 253 white spots 253 wrinkled paper 252 product settings configuring 178 protocols, network 187 proxy server settings 190 PS font list, printing 177 R rear-door assembly removing 62 recycling HP printing supplies returns and environmental program 314 registration assembly removing 102 remote firmware update (RFU) 263 removing parts cautions for 46 324 Index checklists 48 print cartridge 52 service approach 48 sub cover 52 tray cassette 54 repacking product 304 repair approach 48 repeating defects, problemsolving 251, 254 replacing parts cautions for 46 service approach 48 reset, cold 262 Resets menu 194 Retrieve job menu 175 right cover, removing 76 right-rear cover, removing 68 S safety statements 318, 319 screwdrivers, required 46 screws replacing 46 types of 47 security settings 187 sensor tests, manual duplex sensor (C) 142 face up detect sensor (H) 147 FD tray full sensor (G) 146 fuser output sensor (B) 141 paper width sensor 1 (D) 143 rear cover open sensor (I) 149 top cover open sensor (I) 148 TOP sensor (A) 140 Tray 1 paper sensor (K) 150 Tray 2 detect sensor (M) 152 Tray 2 paper sensor (L) 151 Tray 3 detect sensor (O) 154 Tray 3 feed sensor (E) 144 Tray 3 paper sensor (N) 153 Tray 4 detect sensor (Q) 156 Tray 4 feed sensor (F) 145 Tray 4 paper sensor (P) 155 separation stage 30 service approach 48 information form 305 repacking product 304 service ID 261 Service menu 259 settings cold reset 262 configuring 178 NVRAM initialization 260 shipping product 304 Show Me How menu 174 skewed pages 251 skip disk-load 260 Sleep mode power specifications 308 smeared toner, problemsolving 250 software software license agreement 300 solving direct-connect problems 258 network problems 258 specifications acoustic 308 electrical 308 operating environment 309 physical 308 specks, problem-solving 248, 253 spots, problem-solving 248, 253 static precautions 46 status messages, types of 197 sub cover removing 52 supplies managing 177 ordering 268 recycling 313 supplies status page, printing 176 supply messages configuring 177 support online 303 repacking product 304 service information form 305 System setup menu 183 ENWW T TCP/IP settings 187 technical support online 303 repacking product 304 service information form 305 temperature specifications 309 tests engine 134 networks 191 post-service 48 print-quality 48 sensor 137 skip disk-load 260 text, problem-solving blurred 254 misformed characters 251 tips iii tire tracks, problem-solving 253 toner output quality, problemsolving 250 toner cartridges. See print cartridges tools, required 46 top cover, removing 84 top-right cover, removing 73 transfer stage 30 tray 1 cover removing 69 Tray 3 physical specifications 308 Tray 4 physical specifications 308 trays removing 54 Show Me How menu 174 trays, input configuring 177 troubleshooting blank pages 257 direct-connect problems 258 duplexing 246 engine test 134 network problems 258 pages not printing 257 pages printing slowly 257 paper handling problems 242 service approach 48 ENWW transparencies 244 USB cables 257 two-sided printing Show Me How menu 174 U upgrading firmware 263 usage page, printing 176 USB port troubleshooting 257 V voltage specifications 308 W warnings iii warranty customer self repair 302 license 300 print cartridges 299 product 298 service ID 261 wavy paper, problem-solving 252 Web Jetadmin firmware updates 265 Web sites customer support 303 Macintosh customer support 303 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 316 weight, product 308 white horizontal lines or spots, problem-solving 253 white vertical lines or spots, problem-solving 252 wiring diagram 170 wrinkled paper, problemsolving 252 Index 325 326 Index ENWW © 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. www.hp.com *CE524-90909* *CE524-90909* CE524-90909

Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 6.0.1 (Windows)
Keywords                        : Edition 1, 7/2009
Modify Date                     : 2009:03:11 11:20:43-06:00
Create Date                     : 2009:03:09 09:52:57-06:00
Metadata Date                   : 2009:03:11 11:20:43-06:00
Creator Tool                    : XSL Formatter V3.4 MR5a (3,4,2006,0718) for Windows
Document ID                     : uuid:606696fc-296d-4419-8932-b93a88b7b94c
Instance ID                     : uuid:1caa2014-981a-4b7c-87a8-12a03d7e9dfb
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : HP LaserJet Information Engineering
Title                           : HP LaserJet P3010 Service Manual - ENWW
Subject                         : Edition 1, 7/2009
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 342
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Author                          : HP LaserJet Information Engineering
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu